Home

LightFactory User Guide

1. Selection Gijon Layout View Ex Lisan Ch Groups Paietier Selecion Shomcuts MRA tnn AE ra ere Snr nm n Chaser 49 ChannekS Channet st rapran 52 Chnannet 5 Crannet 54 8 Chammers5 Channer S Chrannet 57 aes 58 Crannet 60 a eww Rear ign wasi Rear non wasi Rear Migh w a ga was m high wasi Rear regh wasi Rear Miga wasi Rear high wasi Rear hgh wasi Sar wes Stace Rigtt Wa Orpen Corer Oren rper Creer Orve erer Green Bue L Inactree Vana O Vale O Vake OF Vale O Waue Vake 0 Vaia O vabe 0 Vale 0 Value lo Vake 0 Fade 0 008 Face 000s Fme 0 08 Fade 0 00s Face 0 008 Fete 000s Face 0 008 Face 0000 fose 000s Fade 0 00s Faje 000s Active treet Chemek 44 Channet 62 Chonnet ee Chereret 44 Chennet 65 Chennet 64 Chemek 47 Chennet 69 Chereret 70 Channel 74 Charnet 72 a comet Sisse get Wa Stace Riom Wa Stasse ore Wa Stace Maget Wa S toe figni Wa Stace Right Wa Sisse Riget Wa Stace oht Wa Stasse Mgt Wa Stace Rent Wa Stase Dore We Pevcu ree etw Sre fuer em A ioe cue pee hed Res E Reg S nrd n r Veue O vate 0N Vake 0 Veale 0 Wake o Vake 0 Vaba O Vike 0 Vaue O Jee O Vale 03 pwen Fade 000s Face 0 00s rede 0008 Fade 0 005 Face 0 00s Face 000s Face 0 005 face 000s Fade 0 00s Foce 000s Faje 000s tok Channel 74 Chennet 75 Cheret 76 Chennet 77 Chernet n Chennet v Channet I Chereret R Chennet 83 Channet M T inckutive Stace Len Was Stece Le
2. ceeeeeeeseceesssnseeeeeseeeeeenneeeeeeeees 60 Patching a Moving Light nsansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 61 Controlling a Moving LiQht ccsseeeeessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneseseeeeeeeooeees 63 Creating a Basic SNOW viicvecesseisss cores ccseaseateenseeanerss cuetusiedd versiones 65 Oreatng GUC iventetiet anne eee oie netiaes tensa eeectea 66 SVCAUING GUE Z rirmi yn enalens cteesgameneten 66 Greating CUE S igcainin Ossaomnr ats ccter usasaan acs eewieeeaceetousaenalads cteessamenaten 67 MME CUS IST CIO l ainn 67 Setting the transition between CUES cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 68 PUNDIT s SNOW eonenna ceennbonanmatnonnunasaceiutunencantsiaus 68 Reference WiINdOW OVEIrViICW ccsssccessesenseseeeeeeeseneneeees 70 Command Inte aCe cicania a a 70 command STUC UE eran E A dines TA 71 PIG IMC MUG aa a r lieu tants hat bates ct 17 SUBIMASIEl OPUN Saioa re S 109 SMOMCULODIONS cioran e ditosets heteaebiae 111 Window layout OPTIONS cceeccccseseeeceeeeeeeneeeeeseaseeesseseeeaeeeeesaaes 114 Channel Dis playscope aaa aaien o a aaa aaa aaa 115 GG VW eea acd a T 117 LAY OUI VIOW eii a a a uns 117 SElECION ODUONS eurin ie oe eae 121 2 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONTENTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTING CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS Modifying Selected Channels cccccccsesssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaas 123 Default Rade line iare i aa 124 BSS 4 RN a
3. Set the number of fixtures in this effect Length that effect will run Delete this fixture Number fixtures in effect 8 Pi ase 10 00 H Sec Apply from the effect O00 10 00 le Start offset control O A o 2 Beg Open a grid view of this fixture s segments Figure 104 Effect Editor Controls To the right of each fixture there is a trashcan button for deleting the fixture from the effect and a grid button for opening a grid view of the fixture s effect segments Clicking on the small trashcan icon will remove this line fixture from the effect A confirmation dialog will appear asking you to confirm that you want to delete the fixture Click OK to confirm or Cancel to return to the effects editor Clicking on the grid icon to the left of the trashcan button will bring up a grid view of the segments Effect Detail Editor associated with the fixture Each segment is represented by two lines one for the start state and the second for the end state Every second line will have a pale grey background to assist with identifying the start state The start segments will show the start time offset as a time value in the format HH MM MS minutes seconds milliseconds The end segment provides the length of the segment in milliseconds Care must be taken when editing these values as no range or overlap checking is done http www lifact com 187 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS ED
4. 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS Note It is also useful to learn the command structure because you can enter the channel _ selection syntax anywhere you wish to enter a _ large number of channels e g the Cue List _ Editor COMMAND STRUCTURE The following commands can be entered into the edit box provided along the bottom left of the window To execute any command simply press enter or click on the Execute button to the right Once a command is entered it will automatically appear in the text box above If the command was successful the command will be proceeded by OK followed by the time in milliseconds it took to process and execute the command If the command is followed by the word Failed then nothing will happen as the software did not recognise the command you entered COMMAND HISTORY LightFactory displays the last 100 commands entered in the text box just above the command entry edit To re process or review any command simply double click on the line and the command will reappear in the command entry edit The command will not execute until you press enter or click on the Execute button This enables you to edit the command before resubmitting it for processing Note Commands in the history text box can also be retrieved into the command entry edit using the up and down arrow keys on your _ keyboard Pr
5. Notes Pictures amp Pocket MSN Videos Be f B PowerPoint Search Tasks Mobile ec E Terminal Vidya Screen ery Capture You should see the file you transferred in the My Documents folder When you find it tap it with your stylus or ona smartphone highlight the file and hit the OK key The CAB file will begin the installation process Follow the instructions on screen which may vary from program to program Your software has now been installed and is ready to use You will now find the application in the programs section of your mobile device Programs be Games ActiveSync Calculator amp a P Download Excel Mobile File Explorer SETTING UP LIGHTFACTORY TO USE LFREMOTE There is little or no setup required to run the LightFactory remote with the software You will need to run the version 1 2 of LightFactory or greater for all functionality of the remote to work 250 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE LIGHTFACTORY LFREMOTE IN A WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT A GUIDE FOR USERS TELNET INTERFAGE The LFRemote uses the telnet interface in LightFactory to communicate with the software This option must be turned on to connect with the device To enable the Telnet interface open the System Properties found in the File menu of LightFactory On the System tab is the option Enable telnet Interface Once checked you can connect to LightFactory through port number 3
6. On Level Use this to specify the value fixtures will be set to when clicking on the ON or SOLO buttons in the channel window This also applies to the ON command in the command window GM Submaster To assign a physical submaster to control the grand master set the submaster number in the box provided Setting this value to O will disconnect the grand master from a physical submaster 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS Invert GM Submaster Checking this option will invert the operation of the submaster assigned to the grand master Setting the submaster to O will result in the grand master being set to 100 The flash button can now be used as a DBO function Convenience Options http www lifact com Automatically apply Shutter open with dimmer For moving lights that require a shutter open command to obtain light output it can be cumbersome to remember to consider this when using the fixtures LightFactory can simplify this task by automatically applying shutter open as soon as the dimmer level goes above zero Cue Fade Out applies to outgoing cue Some lighting systems such as strand apply the fade out of a cue differently to LightFactory With this mode turned on the fade out of a cue applies to the cue executed before this one Release set channels on cue go When you press cue go the system will r
7. 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS 2 Right click on the channel window and select Add selected channels to a selection shortcut from the right click pop up menu 3 A small dialog box will appear asking you to enter the shortcut number to assign and an optional description New Selection Shortcut Shortcut number to assign Description Ch Select 25 26 2720 Cancel Figure 66 Assign Shortcut Number 4 Enter the number and click OK to create the new entry warececccccomecccccocomecceccccomecccscscomeccscccomecceccccomocsccoccomecccccccomecseccosomeccecocsomeccsccccomecesccocomecscosccomecssescosmecccccocomecsescccomeccoscscomecesccssomecesccecomecccccccsmeccccscosmececcsosomeccescccomeccoscccomece Note If the shortcut is already assigned you will be prompted to confirm that you want to overwrite the shortcut The shortcut edit window available by pressing Edit Selection Shortcuts in the Channel Window can be used to add remove or edit the selection shortcuts To change any of the shortcuts simply click on the field and enter the new value Note Channels can be entered using the same channel syntax as the command interface Click on the Add button to create a new blank entry and the Remove button to delete the shortcut at the position of the cursor ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO PALETTE Palettes are a way
8. buttons to execute the cue By selecting the Snap option the system will execute the cue without any fade times being applied All fixtures in the selected cue will immediately be set to the setting contained in the cue Use the Fade button to run the cue normally applying all fade times as if a normal cue go had been pressed Click on the Cancel button at any time to return to the show runners window SHORTCUTS AND SUBMASTERS 230 Alongside each of the playback button labels you may notice a number enclosed in brackets These numbers represent shortcuts that have been assigned to the button In Figure 145 below we see an example where the Go button is assigned shortcut 11 and the Stop button assigned shortcut 21 Figure 145 Show Runner Controls Shortcut numbers Show Runner shortcuts are assigned by clicking on the Edit Shortcuts amp Submasters button at the bottom of the Show Runner window 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY SHOW RUNNERS A GUIDE FOR USERS T Show Runner Shortcuts amp Submasters Go Submaster Fade Submaster a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 146 Show Runner Shortcuts and Submasters Editor This window shows all of the 150 show runners and which shortcuts or submasters if any have been assigned To assign a shortcut to any of the buttons enter the desired num
9. Available Fixtures Aa ye ba a TE La pra n J r r Eee 8 Layout window al Lema Figure 46 Channel view Layout view On the left of the window is the list of available fixtures and matrices that can be placed in the layout window To place a fixture or matrix into the layout click and drag it from the available list into the layout window When you release the mouse button the fixture or matrix will appear in the layout and can now be used the same way as the grid display Hold down the shift key to place more than one fixture at a time Using the shift key you can select multiple fixtures and drag all of them at once Moving fixtures around in the layout By default the layout view is in control mode meaning it is expecting the user wants to control and modify the fixtures When you click on a fixture it will highlight it exactly as it does in the grid display To move fixtures around and change the position you must turn on the option Edit Grid Layout When this option is turned on you cannot select fixtures for control as your mouse is now used to move the fixture where you want Click and while holding the mouse button down move the fixture to the desired location Release the mouse button once you have placed the fixture where you want it Figure 47 Layout view Move fixture 118 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY
10. INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY REGISTRATION amp LICENSING Note Information collected during the registration process will be passed on to Dream information is treated strictly confidential and will not be used for any purpose than software security Contact details will not be passed on to any other parties or used for marketing Purposes To convert your license code over the web visit the site 38 http www lifact com convert_license html o can be found tn the registration tab of the system properties or in the about screen under Note If you are using the web site to register the software you will need to know the serial number generated by the software This number the help menu If you are using the built in conversion process _ outlined below you will not need the serial _ number information Li About Jeg LIGHTFACTORY SOFTWARE Copyright c 2004 LightFactory Software Ltd Version 1 1 3 41 Registered to lsat retensSoftware ep LightFactory Software Seri B88E5D2D50D88EC8 copy System will tput to 10 DMX Llatferses Enttec USB DMX Pro 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY REGISTRATION amp LICENSING A GUIDE FOR USERS To use the built in conversion facility click on the Convert License Code button in the bottom left corner of the registration window Register Software Thank you for purchasing LightFactory Please complete all of
11. LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 128 POSITION PRESETS amp OPTIONS Home Fixture Select this option to return the fixture to exactly midway for both pan and tilt Move fixture relative to current position When more than one fixture is selected this option will allow you to move the fixtures relative to where they currently positioned Uncheck this option to ensure all selected fixtures move to the absolute position of the cross hairs Lock Pan Lock Tilt This is a useful option to ensure that a fixture is only moved in one direction If you lock the pan for example only the tilt value will be changed when moving the mouse in the window Toggle Pan and Tilt Control Turn this option on to change the behaviour of the control so that clicking inside the pan and tilt area will toggle the movement on or off When this mode is turned on and you click inside the control the moue cursor will disappear and moving the mouse will move the fixture You do not need to hold your finger down on the button to move the fixture as the control will remain on until you click again on the control Fine Movement When Toggle mode is turned on you will also see an option titled Fine Movement in the position menu Fine movement will slow the response of mouse moves so that the fixture only a very short distance with each movement of the mouse _ Note You can also access the mine m
12. cue go will override this and execute the cue immediately CUE STOP This will stop the execution of the cue immediately Any fades or waits will terminate and the current lighting state will be maintained This will also stop the next cue from being executed regardless of its trigger CUE BACK The cue back button will execute the previous cue the cue whose next cue value is the current cue and terminate the current cue CUE RESET Cue Reset resets the entire cue list and sets the current cue to zero Pressing the cue go after a reset will cause the start cue number to be executed STEP FORWARD amp BACK To the left of the cue playback controls are two buttons for stepping forward and backward through the cue list without execution Stepping though the cues sets the next cue that will be fired by the cue go As you set through the cue the current cue state will change to reflect the next cue to run http www lifact com 229 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS SHOW RUNNERS JUMP TO GUE Double clicking on the progress bars will open the jump to cue dialog This is an easy way to move to a different part of the cue list without having to step through each cue Jump to cue Eg Select cue number to jump to aoo x Figure 144 Show Runners Jump to cue dialog Select the cue number you want to run next and then use either the Snap or Fade
13. due to less light being allowed to pass through Controls the hardness or softness of the beam edge Adjusts the beam so that the light is concentrated on the focal point 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS Diffusion Created using a filter diffusion is the scattering of light Strobe Flashing light of which the speed can be configured via the control channel Table 1 Intelligent Fixture Properties SCENE A scene refers to a static lighting set i e a number of standard lights all at some level of intensity LIGHTFACTORY GONCEPTS CHANNEL GROUPS Channel groups enable you to configure commonly used settings for groups of channels This means that the settings in it can be readily applied to those channels at any time without re configuring them Channel groups allow the simultaneous control of multiple channels at once Achannel group can also be assigned to a slider on a lighting console by assigning a submaster to it A channel group can be configured to have one of five types of behaviour This behaviour defines what happens to the current channel settings when the group is being controlled Override ignore current settings of channels and apply settings of the group to all channels Build build onto settings of other groups Exclusive switch off all channels except for this group Highest Takes Precedence HTP the
14. run for 8 seconds and in that time the pan property will run through its path 4 times 8 2 4 OFFSET Offset sets where the DMX output values start from When the path is at O the actual output will be the offset value All resulting values from the path will be added to the offset up to a maximum of 255 You can also set the offset to be Relative by entering an R into this field This is also its default value when a new effect is created Relative offsets mean that the offset will be whatever the fixture is on when the effect starts This allows you to create a single effect and use it in different parts of the stage throughout your show If you add the effect into a cue then LightFactory will setup the fixture based on the data in the cue and then apply the effect over top With this you can have 2 adjacent cues both using the same effect but running completely differently Note if you are running this effect on Pan amp Tilt then a couple of special conditions apply Firstly the current position of the light becomes the centre of the path If for example we are doing a circle then the offset is automatically setup for us to make the current position the centre Secondly when this type of effect is running you can also use the pan and tilt controls in the channel view to move the position of the effect SCALE The scale is a percentage value that will be applied to the final output A scale o
15. 14 221 channel display 74 96 97 98 115 120 124 176 211 Channel groups 17 109 138 150 172 Channel Groups 17 136 156 172 channel window 18 59 60 61 63 64 65 66 68 70 88 96 115 116 121 125 137 138 139 141 142 143 144 157 166 191 245 247 Channels 12 18 19 23 61 TE 72214212 123 gt 1432 151 152 163 165 172 184 200 258 Chase 109 177 183 236 237 CMY 16 64 129 130 193 http www lifact com LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Colour wheel 15 Command Interface 20 21 25 26 35 59 70 146 244 Contrast 95 Control Channel 15 132 133 219 220 Conventional fixtures 14 cue 21 22 23 26 65 66 67 68 69 70 75 76 78 88 89 90 100 101 115 140 141 142 144 146 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 178 185 203 208 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 250 257 Cue Go 175 cue list 21 22 23 65 66 69 75 76 115 140 141 144 157 158 159 160 161 163 169 171 175 176 178 227 228 229 230 256 257 Cue Number 22 162 173 Cue Reset 175 Cue Stop 175 Cue Trigger 22 Database 85 86 87 DBO 66 67 89 121 122 Delay 174 259 LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS designer 10 desk channels 12 59 83 121 Diffusion 17 Dimmer Patching 13 62 127 213 Dimmers 10 12 13 62 214 215 DMX 11 12 25 29 30 34 36 37
16. Coeur 2 0 Gets 1 6 Gabo IR 0 60 Gets 2 0 Gets 6 Gets IR O Zoom 0 re 6 locus Conto Effect t 0 gm a7 0 Track Teme 0 Fade Tene Effect Tene 0 et Tere Q et Tre Q 10 v Note Intelligent fixtures are identified by the word Fixture rather than Channel The word channel is used to identify simple dimmers The channel view window has two primary modes of displaying fixtures and channels The grid view default will show all of the patched channels in an excel style grid of rows and columns The layout view allows you to place fixtures arbitrarily in the window to more resemble the placement of the fixtures in reality You can change between views at ant time by clicking on the appropriate tab at the top left of the channel view window There is no issue using both views to control your lighting rig as you may want to use conventional lights in the grid display and intelligent 116 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS fixtures in the layout screen LightFactory will switch between the view without effecting the operation of the lights GRID VIEW In the grid view all of the channels and fixtures are displayed sequentially in ann x n matrix of rows and columns The software will automatically display the maximum number of channels it can across the columns and provide a scroll bar to view channels that are off the bottom of the
17. Inclusive selection Active selection Select All Unselect All Select Inactive Select Active Invert Selection Select Next Previous ON OFF Solo DBO Dead Black Out Park Release Release All gt gt gt gt amp Note Selected channels will appear green and active channels channels where the value if greater than 0 will appear in a light blue INCLUSIVE SELECTION If the inclusive selection option is active then each selection made will be added to the previous selection All channels currently selected will remain selected unless they are in the new selection area Any selection will toggle the selection state of a channel If this option is not active then each selection made will unselect any currently selected channels If the selection overlaps any currently selected channels then they will remain selected If you hold down the control ctrl key while making selection in this mode you are able to add channels as per the exclusive mode SELECT ALL GLEAR Use these buttons to select or unselect all desk channels The Clear button is a useful way to reset the current selection http www lifact com 121 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 122 SELECT INACTIVE SELECT ACTIVE Active channels are channels where the dimmer is above zero These channels are identified by the light blue aqua colour Note Selecting active channels
18. It is recommended that you mark this device for future reference Once you have moved the registration to the hardware the software will revert to demo mode no DMX output unless the hardware is connected If you are unsure about this feature please contact out support staff to answer any questions support lifact com Once you have clicked on the button to move the registration a warning box will prompt you to confirm the operation You will need to click on the check box I have read and understand the conditions of this transfer before proceeding HIRE SOFTWARE ONLINE LightFactory provides the ability to use a registered version of the product for a limited runtime This can be useful if you want to try the software on a real show before purchasing or if you only need a lighting controller for limited application The LightFactory hire system allows you to purchase runtime in 12 24 48 and 120 hour blocks Note The runtime is counted only when the _ software is running If you close down _LightFactory the time remaining will still be available the next time you start the software If for example you still have 6 hours runtime remaining and you do not use the software for a week then when you start it up the 6 hours will still be available You must have access to an internet connection _ to purchase runtime blocks Runtime can be topped up before your time has expired 42 2004 2007 Dream Solut
19. Max Value field When the group reaches 100 the channel will only reach the value in this field E g if the maximum value of channel is 80 and the group is at 50 then the resulting channel output will be 40 If the selected channel is an intelligent fixture with additional properties other than a dimmer you will also see these as extra columns in the grid These additional fields allow you to edit the Max Value for all of the properties contained in the fixture This field operates exactly as with the Max Value for the dimmer and specifies the highest value that the property will reach when the group is at 100 To set the value of an entire column of data click on the header of the column to highlight all channels and enter the desired value Press enter when you have entered the desired value To turn off any property so that it will not be applied when the group is used enter O for Off Properties that are turned off will not do anything when ether the value of the group is increased or the group is applied Properties marked as Off will also show greyed out for quick reference when looking at the channel editor window To maximise the included channel side of the window you can hide the available channels by clicking on the hide button between the two sections 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS bse Minimis
20. Verify Install Once the installation is complete an Ergodex hand icon will appear in the Windows System Tray usually in the lower right hand corner of your Windows Desktop This icon shows the connection status of the Pad A blue hand icon indicates the Pad is properly plugged into your computer g If the Pad is plugged into your computer and the Green Light is on you are ready to use your DX1 Input System Green Light indicates Pad is Working properly 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION A GUIDE FOR USERS XKEYS X keys provides a clearly labelled physical input for shortcuts and special functions so you don t have to think about them Insert the included disk in your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions to install X keys Macro Works Software This software is required to program and operate the X keys USB device Please view the Readme file on the installation disk for the latest notes on installation and operation of the software Should you encounter difficulty installing any of the X keys products please check the troubleshooting guide on the web site www xkeys com If this does not resolve the issue please E mail the technical support department tech xkeys com or call 51 7 655 5523 INSTALLING CHERRY G amp O 1950 POS KEYBOARD The Cherry G80 1950 keyboard will arrive fully configured for use with LightFactory if purchased from
21. You can use the macro editor to create new macros or to edit existing ones Open the Macro Editor by clicking on the button at the right of the command interface or by selecting it from the windows menu at the top T Macro Editor Macro Name Exe Shortcut Reset Colours 17 Reset Fixtures 18 Execute a lamp shutdown procedure Turn off lamps 19 on all moving lights 49 56 Control 220 Sleep 3000 49 56 Control 0 Turn off lamps Figure 150 Macro Editor 7 Note You can create any number of macros _ limited only by system resources To create a macro 1 Click the Add button at the bottom left of the window 2 When anew macro is created a default name will be assigned such as New Macro To change this to something more 242 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY MACRO EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS meaningful click in the Macro Name field and type the new name 3 Set the shortcut number to assign an execution shortcut Pressing the shortcut will cause it to execute immediately Set the shortcut to 0 to disable shortcut control Note The edit space on the right hand side of the Macro Editor shows the commands that the macro contains The macro being edited is _ identified by the title just above the edit space _ Clicking on a macro on the left will change which 4 Type the commands for your macro into the w
22. bounce or random from the dorp down 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS The Run times field allows you to specify how many times through the chase will run before stopping Step time and Fade time is provided to override the default values when running the chase in a cue Set the step time to 0 to run the chase manually using a step shortcut Setting the Step Shortcut will allowing you to manually step the chase This shortcut will be loaded when the cue enters and removed when the cue exits This allows you to use the same shortcut in several cues Fade and Step Submasters are also loaded when the cue enters and unassigned when the cue exits This allows you to setup a submaster to manually control the fade transition and step time while the chase is running EXEC SHORTCUT Each cue can also execute any number of shortcuts when the cue runs This allows you to run more complex operations such as executing macros selecting channels or jumping to another cue list Shortcuts can be added by simple typing a comma delimited list of shortcuts Alternatively you can click on the button to the right of the field to bring up the edit window for Cue Execute Shortcuts I Cue Execute Shortcuts Shortcut Delay Sec Fire every Sec Fire on leaving gt 0 00 iM i T22 000 000 v Figure
23. clicking on the Enable MIDI Control Each trigger requires the following settings Description This provides a way to identify the trigger by entering a description for your reference Channel Identify the MIDI Channel to listen on 1 16 Device Device number to listen to default 0 http www lifact com 99 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 100 Note This is an instrument note that will trigger the event On Off Determine if the system will trigger by a note on or note off event Octave An interval between two notes that are seven steps apart on a musical scale Action Each trigger can either execute the cue go operation or execute a system shortcut Use the drop down combo to select one of these options Shortcut If the action is set to shortcut this field is used to specify what shortcut number you want this trigger to execute PGC LINE IN The PC Line in triggers are only able to trigger the cue go function There is no shortcut execution with this event The PC Line In tab provides the ability to set the audio source frequency range trigger level and minimum time between events For LightFactory to listen to the selected audio source you must enable it by clicking on the Enable Audio Line In Control I External Triggers MIDI Control PC Line In Timecode MIDI Messages Source S
24. 000 gt 0 gt 0 210 Figure 87 Show Effect Selection window simple chases To add an effect to the cue select the desired effect from the available list and click the button To remove an entry from the cue select the effect from the right hand grid and click the button The Delay field allows you to set a time for the system to wait before starting the effect after the cue executes Fade In and Fade Out These options allow you to set a different fade in and out time for each effect This will only apply to the dimmer if it is used in the effect Some effects do not use the dimmer at all and on this type of effect the fade in and out will not do anything When the cue exits i e the next cue is triggered all effects will be terminated TIMELINE PROPERTY AND MATRIX EFFECTS Select the Loop check box so that the effect will play continuously while the cue remains current If this is un checked the effect will play once and then stop All effects have a default length when the effect is created To override this default time set the Override length field to the desired value The effect will automatically be rescaled to run within the specified time The Stagger Direction option is only used for property attribute effects and set the way the stagger is setup SIMPLE GHASES The Direction field specifies how the chase steps will play Select from forward backwards
25. 128X 27Y 20 6 30 128X 200Y PZ 20 20 Cs 3 8 100 OO ee S O Table 2 Basic Show Cues Example Before we create these simple cues in LightFactory open the channel window see Using the Channel Window on page 60 and set all of the fixtures back to zero so that no channel is active To do this http www lifact com 65 LIGHTFACTORY QUICK START A GUIDE FOR USERS CREATING A BASIC SHOW Click on the button DBO Clear along the left hand side of the window Now press the Clear button to have no channels selected We are now ready to start programming the show CREATING CWE 71 1 Click on channel 2 and 3 to select them and then type the number 80 on your keyboard and press enter The selected channels should now be set to 80 Unselect these channels and double click on channel 6 to bring it up to 100 Because channel 6 is an intelligent fixture the Channel Fixture Properties window will automatically appear Set the pan and tilt to the desired location using the control described above Controlling a Moving Light on page 63 Once you have set the desired scene right Rec Cue Active click in the channel window A pop up menu Cue List Group 0 m will appear Select Add active channels to a Cue 1 00 A cue from the resulting pop up menu Description Start Cue Delay 0 00 ts The small dialog box at right will be FadeIn 000 displayed You will need to sel
26. 70 Fan ee i Camar JAF Paire Odie ZE E a foe ur e a Figure 71 Crossed To use the Auto Fan select the fixtures you want to position and select this option from the right click menu 148 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS aa Auto Fan AX Fan Crossed Pan Offset 127 gt Tilt Offset 127 2 Scale 3 C Fan with Tilt property Figure 72 Auto Fan Option Use the pan and tilt offset to position the moving lights into the centre of the stage Adjust the Scale option until the desired look is achieved Use the radio buttons at the top to switch between a fanned or crossed look on stage You can create further effects by swapping the fan function to the tilt property of the fixtures Use the check box at the bottom of the window to see the effect of this operation http www lifact com 149 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR Channel groups Scenes amp Submasters are a convenient way to manipulate a number of channels and fixtures with one control Channel groups can operate on any number of fixture properties and do not need to operate on the dimmer You can also add channel groups into cues thus creating stage looks that can be altered in one location and applied across all cues Group Name Channels Value Fade Time Behaviour Su
27. 88 Cue Execution Shortcuts In this window you can also specify a delay before running the shortcut The system will then wait for the specified time before the shortcut executes To run the shortcut on a recurring bases enter a time between execution in the Fire every field http www lifact com 171 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 172 To run the shortcut when the cue exits tick the check box in the column Fire on leaving CHANNEL GROUPS By adding channel groups to a cue you can setup stage looks that can be edited in one place and applied to any number of cues For example if you are on a touring show using moving lights you may have different positions for every venue To avoid having to re plot every cue each time you enter a new venue you can setup groups containing the position preset information Each time you need to setup a new venue you will only need to change the group and the new positions will be applied to all cues containing this group Channel groups can be added by clicking on the button to the right of the field to bring up the edit window for Cue Channel Groups in Li Cue Channel Groups RAX Available Channel Groups Channel Groups in this Cue 000 Attributes zero A Group Sel Ch Only Dimmer Jaf 001 foh circle bar 001 foh circle bar 003 foh front boxes 003 foh front boxes 003 foh front boxes 003 foh front boxes 004 foh 2Ks 00
28. A GUIDE FOR USERS MT MT MT MT MT al SelectAll Sellnactive Undo Last Sel Sel Next Ea mz Ingeler tAll Cel uct Invert Sel Sel Previn Release Figure 47 Layout view Move fixture Grid Turn on the grid mode to snap the position of the fixtures to a pre defined grid points This mode is designed to help you to produce a clean layout with fixtures evenly spaced on screen There is no need to save the layout view as you changes are stored automatically and the layout will remain until you clear the show or use the Clear Layout button provided LOADING AND SAVING LAYOUTS If you want to work with many different layouts in the same show you can save and load the layout to or from a file on your system Clicking on the Save Layout button will open a dialog asking you to select the file name and location to save the layout to Enter a meaningful name to describe the layout and click on the Save button to complete the operation Clicking on the Load Layout button to first ask you to confirm that you want replace the current layout with the one you are going to load After you have confirmed you request the load dialog will appear asking yo to select the file you want Click on the Open button to complete the operation and the layout view will display new layout WORKING WITH MATRIX FIXTURES A matrix fixture is a group or array of lights that you want to work with as a single
29. CHASE STEP This option works the same as add active channels to simple chase step however only channels selected will be recorded CREATE SIMPLE CHASE FROM SELECTED FIXTURES This option provides a very simple method for creating simple chases Like the option above this works on selected fixtures and will automatically create a chase step for each of the fixtures CREATE EFFECT FROM RUNNING LIBRARY EFFECT If you have library effects running directly in the channel view you can turn them into show effects by selecting the option in the menu The channels that the effect is currently running on will be used to build the effect A dialog will be displayed asking for the effect group and name to be given to the new show effect http www lifact com 145 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 146 New Effect Create effect based on Dimmer Stagger 1 Effect Group Colour options Effect Name Figure 69 Creating an effect based on library LEVEL GROUPS Level groups are a convenient way to select a particular DMX value by a simple description Level groups created in the Level Group Editor will automatically become available in this menu The Level Group Editor is available via the Extras button on the Command Interface To use a level group select the desired level by its description and notice that all selected channels will be set to the associated
30. CTRL key and pressing the corresponding number on you keyboard The selection shortcuts that have been assigned to control keys are shown in the drop down menu of the quick access control Use the option Filter by selected matrices to sub select channels by the currently selected matrices in the layout view THE RIGHT CLICK MENU To assists with programming LightFactory many operations are available from a pop up menu in the channel window Click on the right mouse button while over the channel grid to activate the menu See Figure 62 Many of these options can also be access via buttons that will appear permanently on the left hand side of the window By default these buttons are not visible however you can turn them on in the Appearance tab of the System properties ES thann H Display Kur EIR Seca Nec ina i i j ms mmm a a Falin Ch imp Feehan Lechon Lonin r ij aaaea aa o a aIIi ooaoaoM A i Chavet Chawet Chmnet Channekd Dew Srupahel me Time hs 1 Tiat yr S m Ls vo Vide EAL a hee E tein OS ie a ens es Face 0 008 Fade Q ia Fide Da a Ase Com i r aa i Channet 13 Dhamet 1 Chemet 15 Channo 0i Chinni TF Dhimmi 18 r i Rear bayi asai Dea agh wani Rawr igh anbi Rear hupi asii Dam rage sai a high weal fer Sober ee i r Bu r us roa Se hom Tei Dik 5 i bisa Celacied oa Ga om fe d gg m e Channet 18 kJ Chars
31. FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR PROPERTY ATTRIBUTE EFFECT Create this type of effect to assign a time vs value path to specific attributes or properties of fixtures When the effect runs the selected properties will apply the set values over a set time x L Effects Editor Joke Show Effects Propesty Attriute homs Etfect Qmac fy gt hout Al Chores a r Channel Fores Path Proguerty Langh Offent Scale Stat Pos Stagger tf Stagger fmanan P 1 MAC 2 tae D 12345679 Sin Wave Pan w 200 a D a nx A 0 A j al gg a Banac f1 F 2 MAC Z lt atts start iE 3 MAL amp F back owing 0E 4 MAL 2 MaC 3 E 12345678 Cos W wan 21 27x aj ali I beasties crash IC G Mar 3 i tec E EF basile E mar 2 boowe thutter 4 f fy io fP 10 5 freedom E A heeds is Haser i Library Effects Add iiem Path Avabatle Path s 182 s Sin Wave Deicrpien Thodad Ja Now Path gt Cos Wave fel Cory en Cos Wave Lok he Copy Path ive W ay py h i Ch 1 Kenove lten WM Wa 140 Remove Pah so a Ub L rrim l of e goer a Show Helo r a s 7 Add naw fivtunes to the selected fx ten E Lashety ai Diemer Siacoer O lt Aad Group Agg E Nect 00 00 00 i a 1 _ Remove Group Remoa kleci Loop f Figure 120 Effects Editor Property Attribute Effect In the above example a property effect has been created to operate in fixtures 1 through to 8 Th
32. Go Bai C Perre Sai vue Figure 141 Show Runners Window LightFactory provides the ability to assign cue lists to up to 150 show runners split across 10 pages Each page displays 15 runners and the page you are viewing can be changed using the page control in the bottom left of the window To use a show runner you must assign a Cue List and a Starting Cue number This determines which cue will be executed when the http www lifact com 227 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS SHOW RUNNERS 228 Go button is pressed for the first time It also determines which cue the system will jump to when the Reset is pressed Assign the cue list and starting cue number using this button Current cue status Cue progress indicator 1 02 Jailhouse Rock aa 1 02 Jailhouse Rock Start Cue 0 00 Stat Go 62 Reset 53 2 on Le Starting cue number Cue list group Show Runner Number Figure 142 Show Runner Example Playback controls Click on the green arrow on the left of the runner to assign a cue list and starting cue The following dialog will appear listing the available cues and cue lists in the system LI Select Starting Cue Joe Cue List 0004 A 0 000 Start 2 000 Cue Number 2 000 3 000 Cue Number 3 000 4 000 Cue Number 4 000 5 000 Cue Number 5 000 6 000 Cue Number 6 000 7 000 Cue Number 7 000 8 000 Cue Number 8 000 v Description Cue
33. Image Right clicking on any of the active shortcuts i Cun Chan NIT Edit Shortcut 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS will produce a pop up menu that will allow you to edit the description and change the button and text colour add an image or jump directly to the appropriate edit window of the shortcut o _Note Changes made to the description or colour The size of the text displayed in each shortcut can be modified using the edit provided in the top right of the window Default size 8 points Changes to the text size will take effect immediately The full screen button to the right of the text size edit box allows you to toggle the window into a borderless full screen mode This can be useful when using the shortcuts page with a touch screen monitor The window can be returned to its original size by clicking on the same button HARDWARE SHORTCUTS Programmable keyboards can be connected to the LightFactory system to provide physical shortcut buttons Programmable keyboards are most commonly used in point of sale environments but are perfect for this application Each key can be assigned a sequence of characters to send to the computer and are generally designed for heavy continuous use LightFactory has a built in command sequence that will trigger shortcuts from programmable keyboards Each shortcut can be triggered by the key se
34. LIGHTFACGTORY LIGHTFAGTORY STARTING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS 7 Once complete click on the Next button to finish the install process Result The Installation Complete window will appear ei Pi 8 Click Close to close the window Keep the Run LightFactory 1 2 now checked to start LightFactory when the install closes STARTING LIGHTFACTORY After the installation is complete you can begin using the software If you did not select to start the software at the end of the install you can start LightFactory either from the Windows Start menu or from the icon on your desktop From the Windows Start menu Select the LightFactory item From your desktop Double click on the LightFactory icon Result The LightFactory splash screen will appear and the software will begin to load http www lifact com 33 LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS STARTING LIGHTFACTORY Note The first time the software runs it will _take slightly longer to start up This is because it must create the database that is used for saving During start up the software will check for a valid registration code If the software is not registered then the following dialog will be displayed LightFactory Registration LIGHTFACTORY SOFTWARE Software is Unregistered LightFactory is currently unregistered and will not communicate with any DMX hardware If you have purchased this software
35. Licensee may not transfer the benefit of this Licence or the Software to any person or entity without the prior written consent of DSL DSL may assign or transfer this Licence without the Licensee s consent 4 Warranty 4 1 DSL warrants that when the Software is used with reasonable skill and care it will operate in accordance with the functional specifications published at http www lifact com prod_spec html This warranty is valid for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of purchase 4 2 The warranty in clause 4 1 is void if the Licensee is in breach of iV 4 3 4 4 5 5 1 5 2 any term of this Licence or if failure of or defect in the Software has resulted from accident abuse misapplication abnormal use or use other than in accordance with the specifications outlined on the website http www lifact com prod_spec html If a significant defect in the Software is found in the ninety 90 day warranty period the Licensee may return the Software for a refund on giving written notice to DSL The Licensee is not entitled to any updates patches fixes or upgrades in respect of the Software unless DSL in its absolute discretion otherwise agrees DSL may in its discretion provide limited email and telephone Support in respect of the Software but following the 90 day warranty period reserves the right to charge the Licensee for the provision of support Subject to clause 4 1 all conditions warranties terms rep
36. List 0004 starting from cue GO Shortcut 0 GOSub 0 STOP Shortcut 0 LevelSub 0 S BACK Shortcut 0 S RateSub 0 RESET ShortcutO S Playback 0 S se master playback Clear Cancel Figure 143 Show Runners Cue selection Expand the cue list that you want by clicking on the small plus next to its name and then select the starting cue Normally Cue 0 Click on Select to use this as in the show runner or click Cancel to return without making any changes To clear out the show runner and disable the playback controls use the Clear button 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY SHOW RUNNERS A GUIDE FOR USERS The description field can be used to enter a meaningful name to the show runner for future reference Use the other fields to set shortcuts and submasters to the show runner After you have selected a valid cue list and starting cue number the playback controls will become active You can now use them to run your show PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS CUE GO This will execute the next cue in the active cue list If there is no current cue active the cue go button will execute the starting cue number specified As soon as this button is pressed the cue will start the cue progress time will start counting down the execution and the progress indicator will show the cue progress If the cue is triggered by some external event such as a timecode then the
37. Loop Continuously Submaster Assigning a submasier to the runner will override the dimmer of the fixtures contained in the effect As the effect runs the position of the submaster will determine output of the fixtures Playback Assigning a playback will disable the submaster edit box as only one can be assigned to the runner A playback relates to the Enttec Playback wing Assigning a playback does more than just utilise the fader on the wing but also allows you to use the play back and pause buttons to run the effect Start Stop Shortcut Set a shortcut number to assign to the playback controls for this runner Pressing the shortcut will start the effect running Pressing the shortcut while the effect is running will pause the effect and pressing it twice within 2 seconds will rewind the effect to the start Override Effect Length Set this field to change the length that the effect will run for If this value is set to 0 the default length Set during creation of the effect will be used If the effect length is overridden then all of the segments in the effect will be rescaled to this new length Loop Continuously Check this option to make the effect loop back to the start when it finishes If this option is not checked then it will stop as soon as the effect ends http www lifact com 235 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS RUNNERS CHASE OPTIONS 236 Description beatles cras
38. Macros 26 55 243 Matrix 86 119 120 177 181 205 206 207 225 239 Media 81 86 95 177 181 182 208 240 MIDI 22 28 99 101 173 Moving Light 61 63 194 195 OFF 121 122 123 155 ON 88 121 122 123 On Level 88 Palettes 26 89 136 143 246 Pan 15 126 127 128 191 195 203 215 216 Park 121 122 Patching 13 59 61 63 223 Pathport 51 82 83 Pause 24 111 212 241 Permissions 107 Play 24 208 212 240 Print 39 156 176 224 record 39 76 90 123 139 141 144 145 157 218 222 http www lifact com LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Registration 35 36 37 40 41 91 92 Release 27 89 118 121 123 Remote 248 252 253 254 255 256 257 Saturation 95 scene 17 65 66 67 140 Scenes 150 Scheduled Tasks 103 Select active 122 Select All 121 156 Select Inactive 121 122 156 Select Next 121 122 Select Previous 122 Shortcuts 20 21 26 81 98 111 112 113 136 141 142 143 154 155 171 211 230 231 246 show 10 21 22 34 59 62 65 66 67 68 69 76 77 78 79 80 81 85 86 88 89 94 104 106 107 116 119 120 124 125 131 140 156 158 159 160 162 163 165 169 172 173 175 176 182 183 187 188 192 203 206 209 210 214 215 219 225 227 228 229 230 231 232 234 254 SMPTE 28 101 Solo 121 122 Stagger 170 203 204 238 Strobe 17 135 261 LIGHTFACTORY A GU
39. Select All button in the bottom right hand corner of the window To unselect all of the currently selected groups click on the Unselect All button SELECT ACTIVE SELECT INACTIVE To select the currently active groups groups where the value is greater than 0 click on the button labelled Select Active Click on Select Inactive to select all of the groups where the value is currently 0 SORT VIEW Change the sort view to reorder the channel groups by group name submaster or shortcut MENU OPTIONS 156 4 Channel Groups Scenes amp Submaster 1 2 3 4 flo d Truss 7 Print channel groups Add selected groups to a que Add active groups to a que Figure 77 Channel Groups Menu options PRINT CHANNEL GROUPS Select this option to print out the channel groups in this show A preview window will show the pages to be printed and allow you to select other printing options ADD SELECTED GROUPS TO A CUE To create a new cue or add groups to an existing cue 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS 1 Select the groups you want to add to the cue by clicking on the button to the left of the row Use the shift or control key to select multiple groups 2 Right click and select Add selected group to cue The cue selection dialog will pop up to select the cue into which you want to add the group Set the
40. Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS MATRIX LED EFFECT This effect type is specifically designed for large arrays of lights and LED fixtures Every LED fixture provides a different way to control all of the individual lights contained in it To define the layout of the lights use the Edit Matricis option in the dimmer patching window See Edit Matricis Page 224 Ei tFfects Editor MAF Show Ffiecis oon Mate Elect Length Mate Dehra mage ot Wacker Fike Sec H r Masha __ DDRAULT GAY Dema besiet IE 22 38 10 00 Horr ee ee ee Femove Gae Mamore Chea Figure 124 Effects Editor Matrix LED Effect Once you have created the effect you must define the background that the effect will operate on The background can be a jpeg bitmap flash or video AVI file To set the background either enter the filename into the Image or Video File edit box or click on the button to the right to bring up the open file dialog box A default background image is always available by clicking on the Default button in the top right of the window The default image allows a you to create simple colour fades by providing a pinwheel of the colour spectrum When a new effect of this type is created the default image is always set Once the background has been set you can define a path that the matrix will use to play the effect In the example above the matr
41. Starting with g B OR Channel Range All fixtures will use the same path Figure 94 New Effect Builder Prop Attrib Effect Page 1 Enter a name to identify the effect and set the default length The channels or fixtures can be set using either a channel range using command interface syntax or by setting the start channel and number to include When the effect is created with more than one fixture the wizard can place all fixtures into one path or create a sperate entry for each Use the All fixtures will use the same path option to set how the fixtures in the effect are organised New Effect Builder Property Attribute Effect Property Attribute Pan Effect path Is in Wave Create a copy of this path for editing Figure 95 New Effect Builder Prop Attrib Effect Page 2 When you are happy with the settings click on the next button to move to page 2 of the effect wizard Here you can specify the attribute that the effect will be applied to and the default path it will use The predefined paths sin cos saw pwm cannot be edited or changed To create an effect using a one of these paths as a base that is will be changed select the option Create a copy of this path for editing 180 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Click on Finished to create the new effect and open the effect editor The newly created
42. The DMX 512 protocol is a stream of data that is sent via a cable system connected between the data transmitter LightFactory and a data receiver which could be anything ranging from a basic light to intelligent lights smoke machines etc rrrr a Dimmer Pack Dimmer Pack Dimmer Pack Dimmer Pack LIGHTFACTORY LightFactory uses the standard DMX 512 protocol to communicate with the equipment it controls DMX is connected to the LightFactory software via either a USB DMX connection See USB on page 29 for more about USB or Ethernet to DMX converters http www lifact com 11 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTING CONCEPTS 12 DIMMERS In the simplest terms a dimmer is a physical apparatus used for controlling the intensity of a basic light A dimmer can be fully on fully off or somewhere in between The setting of a dimmer is referred to as the DMX value DMX values range from zero to 255 A value of zero means the light is off and 255 means the light is fully on By adjusting the DMX value up and down the intensity of the light increases and decreases Basic dimmers come as units known as Dimmer Packs usually made up of 4 to 24 dimmers per pack For example a 12 pack consists of 12 dimmers Each dimmer is a physical plug on that 12 pack each of which operates independently of the other 11 DMX VALUE The setting of a dimmer is referred to as the DMX value DMX values rang
43. and have a valid registration code click on the Register button To obtain a valid registration code please click on the Purchase link below www lifact com Continue Figure 5 Unregistered System Screen If you wish to use the software unregistered Software will function normally but no DMX output will occur click on the Continue button or press enter on the keyboard To purchase the software on line or find a local reseller of the software click on the Purchase button provided You must be connected to the Internet as this will open your default web browser and redirect you to the LightFactory web site 34 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY STARTING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS To enter a valid registration code received with purchase of the software click on the Register button The following window will allow you to enter these details into the software Serial Number 688E5D2D50D88EC8 User Name LightFactory Software Organisation Registration Name LightFactory Software Registration Code Convert License Code Figure 6 Registration Screen Registration of the software is based on the Registration Name Generated Serial Number and the Registration Code The User Name field is optional and not used to authenticate a valid registration Enter your registration details and click on the OK button to con
44. and the message will change to Done You should be able to find the newly created file in the location you specified Note backups can be done directly to networked computers by entering a fully Restore 1 To restore a database from a backup file you can either Enter the path and filename into the edit box provided or Click on the button to the right to select the file from a standard windows dialog box Warning Restoring a database will completely overwrite all shows including the current show currently in the LightFactory system Note After restoring a database the _LightFactory software requires restarting 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS 2 After selecting the file name to restore the database from click on the Restore Database button Two confirmation dialog boxes will warn that this process is non reversible and ask if you want to continue with the restore 3 A Working message will appear to the right of the button and all controls will become inactive Once complete a dialog will appear indicating that the software must restart Click on the OK button and LightFactory will shut down 4 Restart LightFactory http www lifact com 87 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 88 SETTINGS The settings page provides access to set default properties when creati
45. command was successful or not If you see the word Failed after the command you entered then the syntax was not correct and the system did not do anything OFF If any of these keys are pressed with the command line blank nothing else typed then they will execute immediately on the currently selected channels Channels can be selected by entering channel numbers and not entering a values to assign to them Pressing the or key will increase or decrease the channels by the Scroll wheel setting in the System Properties of LightFactory The BS Backspace key is used to correct mistakes made when entering commands into the system This key will remove the last character of whatever is typed SHUTTING DOWN 258 Before closing down the LightFactory remote you should disconnect from the server using the Disconnect button on the bottom left of the screen Once disconnected the buttons on the remote will become disabled and the button you just pressed will be labelled Connect This button can now be used to connect again or you can close the application by clicking on the small X in the top right hand corner of the screen 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INDEX INDEX Active 121 122 123 140 156 159 Artnet 51 Attributes 14 Aux Dimmer 216 Back 24 69 75 111 175 176 229 231 Beam framing 134 Behaviour 154 blackout 75 Brightness 95 Channel Characteristic 13
46. each point becomes a step The effect will play normally however when each point is reached the effect will pause and wait for a play command MEDIA EFFECT OPTIONS Description mpzz Group media Ml Eiiest me22 l Exclusive Group 0 lt 3 Independent Submaster 0 Playback Start Stop Shortcut U Override Fx Length Seconds Loop Continuously nom c Submaster Assigning a submasier to the runner will override the volume of audio and the brightness of video during playback of the effect Playback Assigning a playback will disable the submaster edit as only one can be assigned to the runner at a time Assigning a playback will control the running the media file plus provide submaster functionally via the slider below the playback controls Start Stop Shortcut Set a shortcut number to assign to the playback controls for this runner Pressing the shortcut will start the effect running Pressing the shortcut while the effect is running will pause the effect and pressing it twice within 2 seconds will rewind the effect to the start Loop Continuously Check this option to make the effect loop back to the start when it finishes If this option is not checked then it will stop as soon as the effect ends PLAYBACK CONTROLS Along the bottom of the effect runner frame are the three playback controls and a progress time indicator P Play 240 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFA
47. fixture and as a number of individual fixtures They are represented as a two dimensional grid of pre defined rows and columns Fixtures do not necessarily need to occupy every cell of http www lifact com 119 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 120 the grid in the matrix See Page 224 Edit Matricis for detailed instructions on how to setup and define a lighting matrix when patching your system Once a matrix has been defined you can add it to the layout view exactly the same way as any other fixture You can also work with the matrix the same way you would with a fixture Selecting the matrix and applying a dimmer level to it will apply this level to all fixtures contained in the matrix To work with the individual fixtures defined in the matrix we simply double click on the matrix to open a new channel display The new window will show only the fixtures that have been setup and will have a fixed row and column count Selection dt j kaw j Pisdure 1 Fixture 7 Pe st Piature T Miren IAC ISO Woas 4 MAC 250 iode d WAT 250 Loda d UAC 250 ese d Omwner 0 Dimmer 0 Dimmer 0 Ommer 0 a 27 C en p gt T sA ar 27 0 Coeur 1t o Debs 1 0 f 1 oth n ma Gene 1k Focus 12 Faces 12 ocus 129 focus 12 otus focus pare ro net ar nate ect Mect 1 e te t LE Matric Sourounds jO X i Fisha Pisture 4 Fixture 6 shar fixture a i VAC J50 Ube 4 UAC 750 Wode d
48. greyed out and will not respond to mouse clicks Most of the fixture properties provide access to both a helper control and a real value control The helper control is generated from the fixtures setup and is typically a way to access real world representation of what the light will do In the colour example below the DMX value of 64 can be meaningless to us but the box on the left shows us that the value 64 in colour wheel 1 will produce green Real property value ll DMX Colour Wheel 1 MS oooi O 64 3 Helper control Sometimes we do want values other than what is available in the helper control It is optional when setting up new fixtures to provide help information such as all of the available colours in a colour wheel For this reason LightFactory always provides access to the actual DMX value and this number can be modified to override the selection in the helper control When the fixture properties window is displayed the helper controls will find the closest match to the current properties DMX value Some controls that have a more ambiguous result do not provide a helper control The effects are a good example because every brand of fixture may implement a different set of effects All of the real value controls can be operated by either typing a value into the box provided clicking on the up and down buttons to the right of the control or using the mouse wheel to increment or decrement the value PAN amp TILT The
49. group with the highest settings for the channel will control that channel Lowest Takes Precedence LTP the group with the lowest settings for the channel will control that channel Independent channels in an Independent group will override all other requests by the system As soon as the http www lifact com 17 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS 18 group level is above 0 channels within this group will be controlled by the group These five behaviours are further explained below Use the Group Editor to create and manage channel groups See Channel Group Editor on page 150 to learn how to do this You can also add channels to existing channel groups via the channel window See Add selected channels to group on page 138 for more information OVERRIDE When a channel group is set to Override it ignores the current settings of the channels in the group and applies the settings for that group to those channels Example Channels 1 and 2 are set at 50 Channel Group 1 contains Channels 1 2 3 and 4 If Channel Group 1 is set to 80 all channels in the group will get set to 80 regardless of what the individual channels original values were Current Channel Resulting Channel Group Value Value Value BUILD When a channel group is set to Build it will take the current settings and add the settings of the channel group to them This only applie
50. iii When the button is released the top row will be resized to reveal all of the properties that can be controlled with this fixture Note You can also auto size the cells to see all _ of the properties attributes for all fixtures patched Right click on the channel grid and select Autosize cells from the resulting menu 3 Click and select channel 6 and as well as highlighting the cell The fixture property window will appear and attach itself to the right hand side of the channel window http www lifact com 63 LIGHTFACTORY QUICK START A GUIDE FOR USERS CONTROLLING A MOVING LIGHT fetes a Lp is i Sn ee becin Tre Ti ste Criei 0 La 2 Lt i sin FS 5 Figure 18 Channel View window showing fixture properties The Channel Fixture Properties window can now be used to modify the properties of the moving light At the top left of the window is the picture of the luminare This is also the pan and tilt control 4 Click and drag the mouse around this picture to change the X and Y values of the fixture in the channel window If the fixture is physically attached to the system the changes will immediately take effect and you will see the fixture move Only the controls that are applicable to the selected fixture will active and can be changed In the above example Figure 18 the MAC 250 does not have CMY colour mixing The properties window will not allow you to change these values 5 To
51. is not seen then the fixture does not support any of the advanced options BEAM FRAMING Beam framing is an advanced feature available on some fixtures to shape the output of a spot luminare Position Angle Fraim1 14 34 14 3 Fraim 2 15 10 Fraim 3 11 J Faim 4 9 10 Fraim Rot 0 Framing is a similar process to using shutters on conventional profile luminaries and is controlled in a similar manner with intelligent fixtures LightFactory provides 4 framing shutters controls each able to set the position and angle Some fixtures also allow you to rotate the frame The Frame Rot control can be used to implement this Note If your fixture does support framing control and the controls are unavailable you can configure the framing control settings for the fixture using the fixture editor See Edit _ Fixtures on page 216 for details SPEED CONTROLS For fixtures that support control over the transition speeds of different properties LightFactory provides access to the supported function her If the property is not available the control will be disabled 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW CHANNEL DISPLAY OTHER CONTROLS LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Focus Speed Dimmer Speed na oa Colour Speed Gobo Speed 26 Beam Speed 14 Tracking Speed Effect Speed a The following additional controls are available in the fixture control window Zoom D
52. lifact com 247 LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE INSTALLING LFREMOTE LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE Windows ay Mobile The LightFactory Remote LFRemorTe is a Separate application designed to work with Windows Mobile hand held devices It provides easy access to the features of LightFactory from a hand held remote control If your device is equipped with wireless network access then this immediately becomes a useful way to control the software from anywhere in your venue Figure 153 LightFactory Remote The most common practical application of this is to use itas a remote rigging device You can turn fixtures on and off without having to return back to where LightFactory is setup and running _ Note LFRemote is designed to work with lt Windows Mobile 5 only and will not run on _ Windows CE devices or Palm OS devices INSTALLING LFREMOTE LFRemote is distributed as a single CAB file for installation on Windows Mobile devices The CAB file is designed to run within Windows Mobile and must be transferred to your Pocket PC or smartphone before it can be installed 248 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LFREMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS 7 Note For the purposes of this tutorial we ll _ install on a Dell Axim X50v Pocket PC however _ the same process works for Windows Mobile Smartphones Step 1 Moving the CAB File to Your Windows Mobile Device Our first st
53. look and feel If you are running LightFactory on a slow computer system you way also want to turn off some of the graphical options in the channel window LightFactory Properties Ed Syed ee Dalabepe pels Regeln a Cxtenval wings Heda Appeal ance Shochcubhy Charnes wera Gar cole Feira riere bi Gobo bird bak pred caa Hiat Dokmat Ley L el aul Langt view background image OMocunentt ard Settings iatri My Documents gl iy h m view fort kext pre T Skralcute lund Pad sue A fw Skew pichune of mbeir Fetus in charme view E SFran pari anal bbl pecai Pahr eiua ga el Show Fade bar in oharra wiew bie ragular dinmnets E Show Rocke haw in charmed views ine seul Bhar Show mgt check menu opire a ballong im channel yew Fece channel view bo compatible font oO Keep commen ence Gn opel all ole varker Foce stcelerstor character louse ALT kay Oplinise Ina couch screen CO Sharta vind to mimar availble keys in Eriha shoricut keybend Lail seclory Uria Figure 34 System Properties Appearance Show picture of intelligent fixture in channel view If you have patched an intelligent fixture you can display a picture in each cell of the channel view Toggle this option to turn this on or off Show fade bar in channel view for regular dimmers The fade bar is a blue default bar that displays the current channel level and appears just under the text Toggle this option to determine if the
54. ma ana 5 1ISa Hotton Street Ad comeriee 6 Corti at between you CTORY SOFTWARE LIMITED LIL of Te hand New Dealer te e aoa shoud be wxtcated by otha accoptare At ce net rtended to accept these berme De Wed Please read this license agreement carefully A copy of this can be found at the front of this user guide before continuing with the installation http www lifact com 31 LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFAGTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 32 4 5 If you accept the License Agreement click on the I Agree button If you do not accept the terms of the agreement click Cancel This will abort the installation Result The Select Installation Folder window will be displayed A Cipher actary 19 Setups elert iaiia F eiar Accept the default destination folder recommended or click the Browse button to browse for a replacement folder When you are satisfied with the displayed folder click Next to continue Result The Start Menu Folder window appears CO igh cary 97 Ete i ees Walid be sn fat Accept the default destination start menu folder or type the name of the folder you want to use When you are satisfied with the start menu folder click Install to begin the install process Result The Copying Files window appears and the wizard will begin installing LightFactory 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING
55. mouse over the channels you want Click anywhere ni the grid using the right mouse button and select the option Add selected channels to other cues iad selected to Cu E 4 00 Cue Humbe 4000 6 0 Cie Huri 00 EDD Cus Huts 6 000 700 Cus Hurks 7 000 B00 Cie Murnbess 8 000 ua ooo vel D ala i Gerenpien Coe Humba 7000 e Aude E et Pluie Cuta E hraa coat toe Chick Feared gk cea Senan Set Funa cism aa Figure 85 Cue channel select add to other cues Select the cues you want to include the channel in as you would for recording a cue Use the Sel Future button to select only the cue after the current cue 168 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS If you have the option Ignore cues after channel is found checked then as the software progresses through the cue list it will stop add a channel if it already exists It will continue through the cue list for all other channels that it has not found EFFECTS SEQUENCES Effect sequences are an automated sequence of lighting states that run without user interaction For more information and detail on how to create effects see Effects Editor on page 177 A simple effect may be a traditional chase sequence or a more complex effect may perform a series of moving light changes Often when a cue is executed it is desirable to run an automatic sequence until t
56. newly created cue O Note Double clicking on a cue will automatically _ make it the currently active cue and make this _cue list the currently active cue list If a cue within this cue list is active then it will appear highlighted light green To remove a cue 1 Select the cue from the cue list 2 Click on the Delete Cue button 3 A confirmation dialog will prompt you to confirm this operation RIGHT GLICK MENU To assist with many tedious tasks a popup menu provides several convenient options related to creating and managing cues To access this menu move the mouse over a cue and Click the right mouse button E N Copy this cue Added to the end of the cue list Insert a new blank cue below Insert new cue below Copy this cue Set Trigger Selected Cues Timestamp next non zero cue Ctrl T Set Prefetch flag for all intelligent fixtures in this cue Un Set Prefetch flag for all intelligent fixtures in this cue Set Prefetch flag for all intelligent fixtures in cue list Un Set Prefetch flag for all intelligent fixtures in cue list Set Force Prop flag for all in fixtures in this cue Set Force Prop flag for all fixtures in cue list Reset grid layout to default ete ee rer oe op oy H Mone 7 None 160 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS COPY THIS CUE Selecting this will create a new cue
57. of full DMX keyword If the channel selection does not specify a property the DMX keyword can be placed in front of the desired value to enter a number between 0 and 255 representing the real DMX output level Example 14 24 34 74 19 33 DMX 125 This will set channels 1 2 3 7 and channels 19 through 33 to output 125 on the DMX line Fade Value With any command an optional fade time can be specified This will determine how long the channels will take to get from the current value to the new desired value The fade directive will also be apply to fixture properties The syntax is in the format fade X where X is any integer value representing the time in milliseconds The keyword fade can also http www lifact com 73 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 74 be shortened to just the letter f followed by the time in seconds that you want to fade Example 24 30 cyan 150 fade 2 4 This will set the cyan property of fixtures 24 through to 30 to the DMX value 150 and will take 2 4 seconds to reach this value from the current cyan property value Note When working with intelligent fixtures such as the one in this example the term fixture replaces the term channel in On amp Off The On amp Off commands can be used to replace the channel value Setting channels to Off will set the dimmer or attribute value to 0 Setting the channels
58. option in the resulting menu 3 Adialog will appear Select the group from the drop down selection or enter a new group name to create a new group 138 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS g Select Group Group name Submaster 3 AAS re Shortcut 0 Properties to record Cancel Figure 63 Channel Group Selector Selecting an existing group will add the channels to the group selected if the channel already exists in the group it will be ignored If the entered group does not exist it will be created and the channels added The channel or fixture will be added with the dimmer at full and all other attributes off The next available submaster will automatically be selected in the submaster field If you do no want to assign a submaster enter O into this field 4 To complete this operation press the OK button or press Cancel to return to the channel window You can edit the created channel groups via the Group Editor See Channel Group Editor on page 150 for more information ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO GROUP SNAPSHOT CURRENT STATE When using the snapshot option for recording channel groups you can select what attributes you want to record into the group By default the dimmer is selected and all other attributes are turned off A channel group can have any combination of attributes and do
59. order they where added The Path Editor also provides the ability to test your curve before committing it to the effect When you click the test button the fixture will immediately start moving to the path you have created The length of the path is determined by the Path Time field below the test button The default value for Path Time is the length of the effect for which you are creating the path This value in seconds cannot be set to a value greater than the effect length The Elasticity figure below the time value is an advanced feature allowing control over the spline cure and determines the obtuseness of the curve To change the size of the curve created use the resize buttons provided to the right of the edit space Resize Figure 114 Moving Light Path Resize Buttons These buttons will move all of the points toward or away from the centre of the effect thus rescaling the distance the light will move while moving through the path The four arrows below the resize control allow you to reposition the path around the pan and tilt space Figure 115 Moving Light Path Repositioning Controls Pan and tilt can cover a large stage area Often you only want the path to occur in a small section of the full range of the light Clicking http www lifact com 195 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR on these buttons will move all of the points in the direction clicked
60. pages provide colour mixing controls for different methods of building colour Note If the fixture selected only has RGB or _CMY control such as LED fixtures then the colour dialog Figure 54 Colour Chooser will appear automatically replacing the fixture control GOBO CONTROL Gobo systems typically have two primary controls the actual gobo selection and a rotation control 130 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS Note Some fixtures combine both functions into one control channel In this situation only the gobo selection is used to control the feature If rotation is combined into one channel then the gobo helper control will typically select the gobo in its stopped state 7 Snil a Real gobo value DMX 85 4 Riot 0 Gobo Rotation control Gobo helper control Figure 55 Gobo Controls As with the colour helper the gobo control provides a graphical representation of the gobos available in a drop down combo These can be set up and edited in the fixture editor See Edit Fixtures on page 216 for more information On selection of a gobo from the helper control the real value will be displayed in the control below it When the fixture properties window is shown the gobo helper will show the gobo that is closest to the value set If gobo rotation is supported by the fixture the speed and direction ca
61. pan and tilt helper is the large square with a picture of the selected fixture in it 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS Pan amp Tik TT OT T logo will be displayed To set the pan and tilt left click and drag your mouse around the square You should immediately see that fixture you have selected move relative to your mouse movements Note When you click and drag your mouse around the pan and tilt helper control you will notice that your mouse speed slows down This is only a temporary change your mouse speed _ will return to the windows default speed when the button is released This is to make controlling the fixture easier and more manageable Above the pan and tilt helper are the real value controls and the position options emenceccecemeccsssccemecscssccemecssssccemecsscscsemecscssscemecssscscemeccscsssemecssssscemecssssscemecssssccemecsssssccmecscssssemecssssssomeccscsssemecssscscemecssssscemeccscssssmecsessscemecscsssssmescsssssemeccessssemecscsssssmesecssssemes Note If you find that either the pan or tilt operation is inverted to your mouse movements revisit the patching controls and click on the flip pan or flip tilt check boxes provided with _ every channel See Flip Pan amp Tilt on page 215 in the Dimmer Patching section for more information about this http www lifact com 127
62. procedure for DMX IN hardware is exactly the same as installing the DMX2 device 1 50 To install the USB hardware on your computer make sure the computer is running and you are logged in with administrative privileges Connect the USB IN Interface to a free USB Port and check that the power LED indicator is lit If this is not the case check the USB cable and hub your hardware is plugged into Your computer should immediately indicate that it has found some new hardware and the installation wizard should start automatically If this does not occur then use the windows Add new hardware or Computer Manager Win 2K XP option in the control panel to manually install the drivers Follow the procedures described in the section for installing Soundlight Sunlite USB DMX Dongle Page 46 to complete the installation 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS ARTNET DMX ON ETHERNET No special installation is required to communicate with ArtNet DMX on Ethernet or DMXDongle2 devices You must have a working Ethernet device to use this protocol ETHERNET ENTTEG DMX ON ETHERNET No special installation is required to communicate with Enttec DMX on Ethernet ESP devices other than a working Ethernet interface beget ENTrEC Entertainment Technology PATHPORT DMX ON ETHERNET No special installation is required to communicate with Pathway DMX on Ethernet
63. reverse to the logical movement of the light then you can correct it without having to physically change the position of the light http www lifact com 215 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING l MAC 250 Mo wo wt 2 2 a O C Figure 131 Flip Pan and Flip Tilt Options DESCRIPTION 1 amp 2 Each control channel or fixture can be assigned two descriptions up to 128 characters long The description information will be displayed in the channel view and also printed with the patch details AUX DIMMER Some fixtures require a separate DMX channel for dimmer control The Vari Lite VL5 for example does not have the dimmer included in the list of control channels This is because the dimmer is a separate power feed to the fixture To aux dimmer can be used to set the channel number for this type of fixture Use this option when working with colour scrollers where the dimmer is not located at a fixed distance from the control channel EDIT FIXTURES 216 The fixture list can be edited by clicking on the Edit Fixtures button in the bottom left hand corner of the window Bf Fixture Editor BAX Fixture Editor es Martin MAC 250 Mode 4 Acrobat Atomic 3000 4ch Dimmer 2 e C Invert CX 2 MAC 2000 Performance Pan Hi Byte 8 Pan Lo Byte 9 ae MAC 2000 Profile Tilt HiByte 10 TitLo Byte 11 MAC 2000 Wash en x MAC 250 Entour i c L RGB Colour Mix MAC 25
64. should try and keep the number of channels as low you think you will need as the more channels the system creates the slower the start up and the more load there will be on the system To modify the patching of dimmers or intelligent fixtures to channels open the Dimmer Patch window by clicking on the Dimmer Patching button on the right of the command window System Channels or Fixtures Anilao Foch Slarciad Urra alntact E L E Apcukghi E Cy Paty Coat E Cope it se ee ETE Available fixture for patching Figure 129 Dimmer Patching Window The Dimmer Patch window is broken into three sections Channel View On the left of the window this allows you to see all of the 2000 channels and how they are currently patched Dimmer View At the top right is the dimmer view containing all of the available dimmers Fixture List At the bottom right is the fixture list containing all the different fixtures that can be patched into channels http www lifact com 213 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING 214 When LightFactory is started for the first time or when the current show is cleared all channels will be patched 1 to 1 with available dimmers STANDARD DIMMERS By default the Standard Dimmer fixture is selected Standard dimmers use only one dimmer to control the luminare To change the dimmer associated with a channel 1 In
65. so that the current look channel settings replaces what is currently recorded This function operates exactly the same as recording a cue however all existing information and channels will be removed or overwritten LIPDATE CUE WITH ONLY EXISTING CHANNELS Use this option to change an existing cue updating only the channels that are already in that cue Other channels selected or active will not be added to the cue ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO A SELECTION SHORTCUT Selection shortcuts are designed to make programming easier by providing quick access to any number of channels with a single key press To view the shortcuts currently assigned click on the Edit Selection Shortcuts button in the top right of the channel window T Channel Selection Shortcuts Channels Description z 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 VL5s 33 34 35 36 MAC 2000s lt 37 38 x Spots 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 LV1000s lt Auto scroll channel window Figure 65 Channel Selection Shortcuts This window demonstrates that channel selection shortcuts are simply a list of channels assigned to a shortcut ID When the shortcut is pressed the channels in the list will toggle their selection state See Shortcuts on page 26 and Shortcut Options on page 111 for more about shortcuts The easiest way to create a new selection shortcut is to use the right click menu option in the channel view 1 Select the channels you wish to include
66. software displays this bar for conventional channels Show fade bar in channel view for intelligent fixtures Toggle this option to determine if the software displays the fade bar for intelligent fixtures Show right click menu options as buttons in channel view Turn this option on to display button on the left hand side of the channel display for the primary options in the right click menu This provides quick access to these options without going through the menu Force channel view to compatible font By default the software will use a special windows font to allow you to scale the channel 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS display to almost any font size If you find this does not work but rather the font does not look smooth then turn this option on With this option on you will find the applicable size of the font in the channel view will be limited but the characters should be more readable Keep command window on top of all other windows Turn this option on to force windows to keep the command window first window displayed on start up on top of all others All other windows will move behind the command window when occupying the same position on screen Force accelerator character to use ALT key default windows behaviour is that accelerator keys do not require the ALT key to be pressed if no control that requires keyboard input has foc
67. state will be maintained The will also stop the next cue from being executed regardless of its trigger CUE BACK The cue back button will execute the previous cue the cue whose next cue value is the current cue and terminate the current cue CUE RESET Cue Reset resets the entire cue list and sets the current cue to nothing Pressing the cue go after a reset will cause the first cue to start Resetting the cue can be thought of as a rewind to beginning function http www lifact com 175 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR ENABLE PLAYBACK Check this option at the top of the window to enable the special GO and BACK control on the Enttec playback wing You can also access this using a programmable keyboard in the same way as shortcuts The key sequence to run this special playback Cue Go control q followed by A1 Cue Back control q followed by Z1 SNAPSHOT WHEN ADDING CUES When this option is checked adding a cue within the cue list editor will operate in the same way as the add active channels to cue in the channel display As soon as a cue is added then the channels that are currently active will also be added with the state of the fixtures also recorded CUT TO CUE ON DOUBLE CLICK By default when you double click on a cue the system will execute that cue applying all of the set fade and delay times By selecting this opti
68. the fields below to register your LightFactory system When all of the fields are complete click on the register button to automatically complete the registration screen License Code First Name Last Name Company Name Contact E Mail Address Address City State Zip Country Phone Print registration code on completion Register Software Figure 10 Convert License The above window titled Register Software will appear Enter your details into the fields provided and click on the Register Software button The fields in bold are mandatory and must be completed to register the software We recommend that you keep the Print registration code check box active to print a record of the resulting registration code This will print on your default printer When the conversion is successful the window will close and the registration code will be automatically entered into the correct fields of the previous window TRANSFERRING A REGISTRATION TO ANOTHER PC The registration code generated to activate DMX output in LightFactory uses the registration name and generated serial number to authenticate the system The serial number is an internal number created when the software is first started i Note This is not the serial number of your PC and only an arbitrary number generated for the purpose of registering LightFactory http www lifact com 39 LIGHTFACGTORY INSTALLING L
69. to On will set the dimmer or attribute to the on level specified in the system properties When using the On or Off keywords you do not need to enter the symbol prior to the command Example 3 6 9 On This will set channels 3 and 6 through to 9 to the on level OTHER COMMANDS GLEAR CLR Use the clear function to unselect channels and clear the channel display Entering the clear command on its own will clear all channels Optionally you can put a channel list after the clear command to clear only the listed channels Example clr 1 20 The above command will unselect the channel 1 through to 20 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE The cue command can be used to execute cues in the system The syntax is of the form Cue lt cue list gt lt cue number gt Cue Go Cue Back Cue Stop Cue Reset The cue list parameter is the name of the cue list to execute the cue The cue number is any cue number that exists in the cue Example cue Act 1 2 5 This will execute the cue number 2 5 in cue list Act 1 Entering Cue Go will advance the cue list as if the go key had been presses Cue Back will step the cue list back by one cue Cue Stop stops the current execution of cue All fades and effects will be terminated Cue Reset returns the cue list to its starting cue and prepares it for execution The C
70. to quickly set a fixture to a particular state Using a palette is a static operation that will override the current state of a fixture See Palettes on page 246 for more information To add selected channels to a palette 1 Setup the fixtures into the static state dimmer colour pan and tilt etc 2 Right click on the channel window and select Add selected channels to a palette from the right click menu http www lifact com 143 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 144 Add Palette X Description Auto created shortcut Shortcut number to assign 3 Properties to record _ Dimmer Sel All Position Unsel Ail L Colour C Gobo C Control C Other Cancel Figure 67 Add Palette 3 The dialog in Figure 67 will prompt you to enter the shortcut number you would like to assign to the current state You can also select what properties you want to include in the palette using the check boxes provided Note This operation only allows you to create new entries and cannot be used to add to an _ existing palette 4 Enter the shortcut number you would like to assign and click the OK button to confirm the requested action If you have changed your mind click Cancel to return to the channel window ADD ACTIVE CHANNELS TO SIMPLE CHASE STEP This menu option can be used to either create a new simple chase or add a step to an exi
71. unlock serial number will be passed automatically to the web page If you are not connected to the internet on this PC and want to purchase the unlock code from a different PC you will need to note down the current unlock serial number displayed in red on this window Once you have noted the serial number you can enter this on the LightFactory web site http www lifact com hire html Once you have completed the purchase you will receive a unlock code that must be entered into the field provided Entering a valid code will then add the purchased amount of time to the software http www lifacteom LIGHTFACGTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY ENTTEG USB DMX PRO DONGLE Born from the Open DMX USB interface the PRO version is the ultimate USB DMX adapter for all computer based lighting needs 44 1 Features Micro processor enabled 1500 V full isolation data amp power lines to protect your computer from surges 1 Input amp 1 Output connector there is only one DMX port though RDM talkback compatible Internal frame buffering will work on any PC Universe amp user config EEPROM Refresh Rate configurable from 1 to 40Hz Break configurable from 96uS to 1 3mS MaB configurable from 10 6uS to 1 3mS No Receive framing problems compared to Open DMX USB Upgradeable firmware Obtaining the latest drivers The drivers for the DMX USB Pro Dongl
72. window If the channel contains intelligent fixtures the grid will display the fixture name and all of the available properties that can be changed In the example above there are four different types of fixtures each with different property counts RESIZING ROWS AND GOLUMNS IN THE GHANNEL WINDOW The size of all of the columns can be changed by moving the mouse over any horizontal grid line holding down the left mouse button and dragging the column to the required width Columns cannot be resized individually resizing any column will resize all of them Each of the rows can be resized independently to view all of the fixture properties in a cell To resize a row move the mouse over the lower vertical grid line hold down the left mouse button and drag to the required height LAYOUT VIEW The layout view is a free form that by default has nothing on it Before using the layout view you must place fixtures in the desired location Once you have placed fixtures on the form you can then control them by selecting them in the same way as the grid view When placed on the layout window each fixture is represented by a box containing a picture of the fixture its name and the current dimmer percentage Using the magnifying glass controls LSI controls the size of the box representing each fixture can be made larger or smaller http www lifact com 117 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY
73. with the required commands COMMAND HISTORY The command history allows the viewing of past commands made via the command interface This can be handy when something unexpected has happened and a technician needs to check exactly what commands were sent to the dimmers http www lifact com 25 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS TELNET INTERFACE Telnet allows a technician to connect to LightFactory remotely using a hand held device or similar Commands can be sent from the remote device using the command language used by the Command Interface The freedom of remote access to the LightFactory software means that the technician can be almost anywhere while setting up the lighting fixtures and make changes without needing to go back and forwards to the lighting desk PALETTES Palettes are a way to configure a particular look that you may want to recall quickly and without executing several commands to the system A palette may put a fixture into a specific position or setup a number of fixtures into a specific colour LightFactory allows palettes to be assigned a specific list of fixtures or operate on currently selected fixtures MACROS Macros are simple programs made up of a sequence of commands If a particular sequence of commands is used frequently it makes sense to create a macro for them This means that rather than re typing the commands every time the macro can be run instead automaticall
74. 0 Krypton 1 miso C Invert Colour Mix MAC 250 Mode 3 cio Om MAC 250 Mode 4 M al Mac 250 plus m4 Focus 6 z ial Control Channel 1 S m MAC 250 Wash Zoom 0 Yellow 0 MAC 300 Mode 3 0 MAC 300 Mode 4 Strobe Shutter 0 CTC HiByte Lo Byte Mac 500 1 6 C Invert Colow1 3 m Gobo 4 Silo m MAC 500 Y5 Mode 1 Effect1 7 0 A 0 a 0 A MAC 500 V5 Mode 2 oo Colo 20 f Gebo20 fs MAC 500 V5 Mode 3 Colour 30 m Gobo3 0 ilo m MAC 500 Y5 Mode 4 Effect3 12 Hs ib a Hine _ Framing1 pos 0 f Framing1angle9 Focus Speed 9 t Framing 2pos 0 S Framing2ange 0 Colour Speed 0 the oe ete oa en Framing 3pos 0 Framing3 ange 0 BeamSpeed0 Add New Brand Lx Framing4pos 9 Framing 4angle 0 3 TrackingSpeed 0 Framing Rotation 9 P 0 co Add New Fixture Lx Dimmer Speed WYSIWYG Name Mac250 M4 Gobo Speed 0 Capture Name ect Spee Figure 132 Fixture Editor 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS Intelligent fixtures are grouped into their respective brands to help manage the vast list of fixtures that exist To create a new brand 1 Click on the Add New Brand button below the fixture list 2 Adialog box will appear asking you to enter the name of the brand Type the name of the brand and click OK or Cancel if you have changed your mind 3 The brand name can be changed by clicking on the desire
75. 1 56 p m Never Active Figure 39 Scheduled Tasks The following tasks are frequently performed when you want to schedule a task to run on your computer CREATE A SCHEDULED TASK Before a task can be scheduled to run one or more tasks must be created To create a new task click on the New Task button at the top left of the window Scheduled task wizard This wizard helps you to schedule a LightFactory task You will be given the oppertunity to select the shortcut you want LightFactory to run and then schedule it for a convenient time Enter the shortcut you want to schedule to run 10 4 Click Next to continue Ce cot 1 As soon as you click select New Task the scheduled task wizard will start Select the shortcut you want to execute on every occurrence of the task and click Next to continue http www lifact com 103 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE Scheduled task wizard Type a name for this task The default name is the description of the selected shortcut Undefined Perform this task C Daily C Weekly C Monthly One time only C Every Hour C Every 1 4 Seconds lt Back net gt Cancel 2 Inthe space provided on the second page enter a meaningful name to describe the task e g Hourly fountain show 1 Then select how often you want this task to run and click Next to continue 3 The next page is specific
76. 100 using your remote device Ligar ioy Properts Ed rrem Lisbateers Fyre y im Figure 154 Telnet command interface options Use the Telnet Port edit box to set the IP port number that the software will bind to Unless you have a specific port conflict that will not let you use port 3100 you should leave this at its default value LFREMOTE IN A WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT To setup the remote for wireless use you will need the following equipment 1 Working Ethernet connection on your LightFactory PC http www lifact com 251 LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE 2 A Wi Fi 802 11 access point 3 Awindows mobile PDA or Smartphone with a wireless network built in or attached USING LF REMOTE For detailed instructions for setting up a wireless network please visit http www tomsnetworking com 2002 10 11 wireless_networking_ntk_ Once you have setup a working wireless network and can connect you mobile device to the network then no further setup is required and the LFRemote will be able to connect to LightFactory USING LF REMOTE Find the LightFactory Remote program on your mobile device and tap it with your stylus or on a smartphone highlight the file and hit the OK key After a few seconds the program will start and you will see the LFRemote interface CONNECTING When the application first starts all of the buttons will be disabled except for the Connect button found in
77. 18 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 TABLE OF FIGURES LIGHTING CONCEPTS Simple chase channels splitter bar 0 0 0 eee 184 Drop down menu for gobo control ccceeeeeeeeeeees 185 Effects Editor Time vs Fixture Effect 000000 00 186 Erect Editor Conto S oe E 187 Efect Del ail EdItO aosa dyicsdnnsdaeedet 188 Example Creating an Effect Sequence 0 189 Resizing an Effect Segment ccccccccesseeeeeeeeeees 189 Segment Properties Editor for a Simple Light 189 Advanced Segment Properties Window 00 5 190 Pan and Tilt helper popup ccceesesesceeeeeeeeeeeees 191 Editing Advanced Segment Properties using the Intelligent Fixture Controls o icsecwiteeiacieeielianies 191 Effect Editor Right click Menu Options for Segments E E EA E E E E EA AE AE S E E A E E AT 192 Moving Light Path Editor cc cecccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 Moving Light Path Resize Buttons eee 195 Moving Light Path Repositioning Controls 195 Automatic Path Creation Controls cceeeeeees 196 Timeline effect Segment fade in out 0068 197 Auto create Effects Mentari 198 AWO OMS OPUOns eon E 198 Effects Editor Property Attribute Effect 200 Prop effect channel list MeNU
78. 3 i 1ra 0 i 176 oO LUDEA 1H U 173 0 TAN Tel O TH 183 0 le Ol THs 0 1th O Te 0 tA SES Ss Ta Oo a O Ha 14 Oo 1 0 ish OW t47 U 1 0 1 O aml U 2 26 22 26 AG i oH 0 AB U ab 0 aur Oy AR Ol ao ZI O 211 0 212 0 na zia H 7150 ik O aif fle 0 219 O ZA 0 at p at i 2 0 ma 0 2 i ih U ree fa 0 wa O 720 a 0 a 0 702 0 Mo 35 0 7 oO io i 2 0 Pat Bae 40 0 aI 2a fl aa oO 44 0 7450 ik O 247 0 fee 0 249 0 20 0 ato eat ih a 0 Ho 25 0 Sh O 2oF 0 oh 0 a O on 0 wal any 0 ais 0 deel m 0 fhm 0 day g jhe i ence 0 a7 il ee ea HEB ara 27a i r ira U fa 0 A anti oe O ata etd O its oe a oi aed Q ea ei ees dahl 0 24 0 hh 0 ote cat 0 ea 0 ota U a A 0 Ale d Ai O aH Af 0 ily G W7 a 0 A O ata O PULE Jt O aa PLEER J5 ath G 37 0 Ha 0 a9 0 220 0 11 0 a2 0 m0 a4 g a5 0 Tae 0 a7 0 2 0 Ga 0 a0 0 am 0 a 0 77 0 io 0 5 0 i 0 a 0 a 0 i 0 0 0 Mi Hz 0 3 0 H 0 45 0 ME 0 M7 0 Ha 0 449 O 0 0 Kil 0 2 0 43 0 d O 5 0 7 0 57 0 a 0 a 0 36 0 1 0 ie 0 0 Ba 0 5 0 BG 0 WT 0 WA 0 3 0 370 0 Wi 0 a2 0 73 0 a4 0 wS 776 0 T 0 We 6 4 w 0 x 0 wa i WA 0 4 0 35 0 ME 0 r w 0 wa 0 a 0 7H O 2 0 Eai Bi m 5 0 HG 0 a7 0 Be 0 0 400 0 a d 2 0 403 0 4 0 405 0 6 0 a0 0 2 0 40 0 40 0 Hi 0 412 0 43 0 4 00 415 0 6 0 47 0 A N 413 0 47 0 re 422 0 a2 0 4 O 4 0 i 0 37 0 4 0 4 0 43 0 ajig ma p 4 0 0 5 0 EW 0 af 0 om 0 EH g a ap a aso 4a
79. 3 0 244 0 485 0 a ay 445 0 ans 0 oS 0 31 0 92 0 eee 0 154 1 as mE g oar 0 ane ea 0 4 0 Shr w 463 U a0 5 4ER 0 ET ea E 0 4700 a1 o 472 0 a73 0 ara 0 45 0 ar60 ET 47a 0 as o am i 1 i a i s43 D eS Ul 0 EE 0 IRF i a 0 En 0 44 0 1 0 Ex a sg 0 ES i EJ i 447 0 at 0 EN i S on 0 Sh tl Si a 4 5 oie oO S h SE firs 0 Sto Of 1 Ob Siz Figure 140 Dimmer Display Window To open the DMX Display window click on the button on the command window or select it from the window menu Each of the DMX dimmers are represented as a cell in the above grid The DMX value is displayed to the right of the dimmer number Whenever a DMX dimmer has a value greater than 0 it will be highlighted in grey The last tab in the widow will always display the DMX in state for use in debugging submasters Click on the DMX In tab to see what is being received by the DMX in hardware 226 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW SHOW RUNNERS SHOW RUNNERS LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS The show runners are designed to execute multiple cue lists from one place Each show runner is a repeat of functions seen in the cue list editor window See page 156 for more about cues and the show editor Open the Show Runners window by clicking on the button at the right of the command interface or by selecting it from the windows menu at the top ie 1 00h Bisi Cus DOD Chap iumi
80. 39 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 55 59 61 68 71 73 74 81 82 83 84 91 92 110 111 115 122 123 126 129 132 135 146 166 167 168 185 190 192 201 203 213 216 218 219 220 226 243 244 245 255 Dwell 174 Edge 16 135 Edit Live 168 191 Effects 16 23 24 25 111 131 132 136 169 170 174 177 178 185 186 197 198 200 205 208 233 234 235 Enttec 44 45 46 51 52 59 82 83 94 111 113 176 235 236 238 239 Ethernet 11 29 51 52 59 82 83 94 251 External Triggers 99 100 101 260 INDEX fade 22 65 68 69 71 73 74 88 89 96 97 109 115 123 124 136 145 153 154 155 164 165 167 170 171 173 174 176 179 183 185 193 196 197 230 231 236 237 Fade In 174 Fade Out 174 Fan 147 148 149 fixture control 125 130 135 192 Fixture Library 15 86 Focus 16 135 Framing control 16 FX Library 136 Gobo 15 130 131 219 Grid View 117 helper control 126 127 129 131 Highest Takes Precedence 19 154 HTP 17 Hue 95 Independent 17 154 234 Intelligent fixtures 14 25 116 214 217 Invert selection 122 Iris 16 135 Layout View 117 LED 47 50 52 86 130 177 181 205 224 Level groups 146 244 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INDEX Level Groups 146 LFRemoreE 248 249 250 251 252 2594 lighting control 10 11 Line In 100 LTP 17 macro 22 26 76 242 243 257
81. 5 foh stage 005 foh stage 006 circle pink nupos 8mas high stage 4b 4h ab a gt 0 0 0 0 SOOOO 007 circle blue 009 workers 010 foh full 020 PRE Show 030 INTERVAL nan POST Sheu Figure 89 Cue Channel Groups You can add any number of channel groups to a cue To adda channel group to the cue select the desired group from the available list and click the button To remove a group from the cue select it from the right hand list and click on the button Selected Channels Only This option can be used to set the behaviour of channel groups in relation to the channels added to the cue itself If this option is turned on then the channels in the group will not be applied unless they also exist in the cue For example if you have a position preset group with 10 fixtures in it you may want to use only a subset of these fixtures in a cue To achieve this you would add the subset of channels into the cue normally and also add the group into the cue Dimmer Set the dimmer percentage when using channel groups as scenes that you want to add into the cue You can use 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS this option to have the same group in many cues but with different weighting on the dimmer TRIGGER The cue trigger specifies what causes the cue to execute By default this is set to Cue indicating that the software is w
82. CENCE AGREEMENT These terms and conditions Licence form a legally binding agreement between you Licensee and Dream Solutions Limited DSL of 27 Wilkinson Way Browns Bay North Shore City Auckland New Zealand The Licensee will be permitted to use the LightFactory software encompassing all applications and databases Software only by accepting the terms of this Licence Clicking on the I Agree button will constitute acceptance of the terms of this Licence If you are not willing to enter into this Licence the Cancel button should be clicked and you must not install or otherwise download the Software Where the Licensee is not an individual then the agreement of the person accepting the terms of this Licence shall be deemed to be acceptance by the Licensee 1 Intellectual Property 1 1 The Licensee acknowledges and agrees that all intellectual property rights including copyright relating to the Software are the sole property of DSL 1 2 The Licensee acknowledges and agrees that all source code and form definitions relating to the Software are the sole property of DSL and may not be modified in any way 1 3 The Licensee acknowledges and agrees that all enhancements modifications or customisations including associated source code and form definitions made by or on behalf of the Licensee and relating to the Software vest on creation in and are the sole property of DSL 1 4 Subject to clause 2 2 the Licensee do
83. CTORY EFFECTS RUNNERS A GUIDE FOR USERS Use the play control to start the effect running As soon as the effect starts the play control will be highlighted in green and the time progress will beginning counting In the case of simple chases the play control is also used to step through the chase II Pause Pausing an effect will stop its execution immediately but keep the position pointer at the current location If you start the effect again the effect will continue from this location At the bottom of the page is a button to pause all active effects Pressing this is the equivalent of clicking on the pause button of all running effects CI Rewind Pressing the rewind button will stop the effect running and reset its position back to the start If the effect is started again it will start from the beginning At the bottom of the page is a button to reset all active effects Pressing this is the equivalent of clicking on the reset button of all running effects http www lifact com 241 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS MACRO EDITOR MACRO EDITOR The macro editor is an enhancement to the command interface and allows you to create a list of commands that are executed in one operation Note This is particularly useful if you havea sequence of commands that you use frequently Creating a macro enables you to activate the sequence in one operation rather than entering each command manually
84. DMX output from LightFactory you must also have installed some form of DMX hardware See Installing DMX hardware Page 41 for more information on this topic INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Installing LightFactory is a simple process and requires no special knowledge The installation procedure is almost completely automated and self explanatory LightFactory can be obtained on CD or by downloading the product off our website DOWNLOADING LIGHTFACTORY To download the latest version of the software go to the LightFactory website click on the products page and then click on downloads Alternatively you can go directly to this page by visiting http www lifact com download html 30 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFAGTORY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLING LIGHTFAGTORY To install LightFactory 1 Find the Setup exe file you have downloaded from the internet or on the CD that come with the product If you are installing off a CD the Setup exe will be found in the root directory of the CD Some CD s may start this setup program automatically when the CD is placed into the drive Setup exe Double click on the Setup exe and the opening page of the setup will be displayed igh ary T 3 Click on the Next button to begin the setup procedure The License Agreement window appears SOFTWARE LICENCE AGREEMENT These term and condaie Leersee LIGHTY 4
85. EFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS because the light output changes immediately To change this behaviour we could create three different segments the first to fade the light in the second to set how long the light remains on and the last to fade the light out This would be a tedious task and so LightFactory provides the ability to do this in one simple operation Once we have created a segment to the desired length we can make the segment fade in out or both by selecting the desired option from the right click menu Add Fade Fade Time Seconds Figure 117 Timeline effect Segment fade in out When one of these options is selected a dialog will appear asking how long we want the fade to be The fade time cannot be more than half the length of the segment to avoid logic errors Once you have set the desired fade time click on the OK button and the segment will automatically be split up to contain the fade in and or fade out Note To check the fade in and or fade out you have just created you can click on each individual segment and view the segment properties ROTATE SEGMENT RIGHT Select this option to move all of the segments associated with this fixture right by the specified time If any segments extend past the end of the effect they will be wrapped around to the beginning of the effect AUTO GREATE EFFECTS The Auto Create Effect button can be used to m
86. ESEED GESSGESEES SEESEESEEE SEEEESSEED SELSEESESS COEEEESEEE eeeseeesee Right clicking on a submaster will bring up additional options to help identity each fader Change Description Use this option to label the submaster The label will appear along the top of the fader Set Description Colour The colour of the description can be changed by selecting it form this option Reset Description Colour Select this option to return the colour of the description back to its original colour HARDWARE SUBMASTERS LightFactory provides the ability to add physical hardware to the system by using any standard DMX lighting desk By connecting 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS the DMX IN hardware you can connect your existing lighting desk to the software LightFactory will only use the first 100 channels of the lighting desk as submasters but these 100 channels can be paged to provide up to 1000 submasters F SSC eT TSE SE SE SESE SE SE EEE eet SSRN CRM ONO AB Aee VM You can also use the Enttec playback wing as an external submaster board without needing to assign any playbacks See page 52 Installing Enttec Wings for more information about connecting the playback wing to your system For more information on DMX IN hardware please visit our web site www lifact com SHORTCUT OPTIONS Shortcuts are designed to provide quick acce
87. Enter a meaningful name and click on the OK button To use a saved characteristic select it from the list by clicking on the drop down menu A warning will prompt you to confirm that you are about to overwrite the curve that is currently set for this channel PATCH OPTIONS A drop down menu at the bottom of the patch window provides access to various miscellaneous options Reset patch Reset patch by range Clear patch Clear patch by range Import patch data From cs File Print patch Figure 138 Patching options RESET PATCH Selecting Reset patch from the menu will return all of the channels back to a 1 1 patch Each channel will be patched to the corresponding dimmer number To reset only a range of channels select the desired channels by clicking in the left of the system channels grid to highlight the desired channels Select Reset patch by range to only reset the highlighted channels http www lifact com 223 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING CLEAR PATCH Selecting Clear patch from the menu will remove all of the patch information form the system Each channel will no longer be patched to dimmers To clear only a range of channels select the desired channels by clicking in the left of the system channels grid to highlight the desired channels Select Clear patch by range to remove dimmers and patching details form the channels IMPORT PATC
88. H DATA To import patching from a delimited file format csv select mport Patch Data trom this menu An open file dialog will be displayed to select the file to import The format for the imported data is channel dimmer fixture brand fixture name To supply a list of dimmers for a channel enclose the list in quotation marks If you are including an intelligent fixture in the patch information it is recommended that the brand and fixture name be enclosed in quotation marks PRINT PATCH Select Print Patch to print all patched channels to a system printer EDIT MATRICIS Before creating matrix or LED effects you must define how the fixtures and lights are laid out in thee real world This window provides a simple interface to provide a rough layout of the fixtures Lf Edit Light Matrix Add Matix Remove Matrix Rows 18 PS Cols 15 Ss NextFixture 98 PS Resize Figure 139 Edit Matricis 224 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS A lighting matrix is a simple two dimensional grid where each cell can be assigned a channel or fixture from the system On the left of the window is a list of available matricis that have been created previously To edit any matrix click on the name and the right hand grid will change to show the definition To create a new matrix definition click on the Add Matrix button in the bottom left corner
89. IDE FOR USERS Submasters 150 Build 17 Telnet 26 84 251 253 Exclusive 17 Thumb Wheel 124 Tilt 15 126 127 128 191 203 215 216 Timecode 28 99 101 173 174 Override 17 Tracking 23 165 Undo 122 262 INDEX Universe 12 44 83 84 Update 56 142 USB 11 12 29 44 45 46 47 49 50 55 56 57 82 83 84 249 Utilise Colour 95 Video Output Monitor 95 Visualisation 93 Volume 95 Wings 52 54 81 94 Zoom 16 135 207 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd
90. IGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS REGISTRATION amp LICENSING 40 To use the software on another computer you will need a new registration code as the PC will have generated a different serial number The current PC must also be disabled as only 1 system can operate per license To allow you to run the software on other PCs LightFactory provides the ability to transfer a registration from one PC to another This process will generate the new code and disable the old in one simple process Once the software is running click on the File menu and select System Properties Click on the Registration tab and click on the button labelled Transfer registration to new PC Registration Transfer This procedure will transfer your registration from this PC to another Each PC that run LightFactory must have its own registration code linked to the serial number of the PC NOTE Please make sure you type the serial number correctly in the box provided This must match the serial number of the PC you have installed LightFactory Clicking on the Proceed button below will disable the registration on this PC and you will no longer be able to get DM output from it Serial Number of new PC Registration Name NEW Registration Code Proceed i Close Figure 11 Registration Transfer In the box provided you must enter the generated serial number of the PC you want to transfer the registration to Provided are tw
91. IGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS http www lifact com System provides access to settings affecting overall operation of the software This is primarily related to external hardware installed with your software Database Backup and restoring of the files used to store all show information Settings Configuring default properties for creating show cues and providing some convenience options to make using the software easier Registration Options for registering your LightFactory software Without a valid registration LightFactory will not produce any DMX output Visualiser Configures integration with WYSIWYG or Capture visualisation tool External Wings View the available hardware wings connected to LightFactory and display any debug information Media Setting that control the global output of media playback Appearance Configure the appearance of the software Shortcuts Setup special shortcuts to control miscellaneous functions 81 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE SYSTEM The system tab provides access to settings affecting overall operation of the software This is primarily related to external hardware installed with your software EE LightFactory Properties x Suchen Dalabepe pels Heydar Viewer Caiena wings Meda ppsa hobo DEE Out Harea E rilec LISE OMC2 Fro ORG Iri Handvwans Erieg U56 DM Fie
92. ITOR I Effect Detail Editor 50 MAC 250 Mode 4 _ Seaments Dimmer i zy Colour 1 Gobo Effect 1 00 00 75 255 255 Effect 2 0 gt 2i 10 255 lt E lt E gt 20 a 0 0 0 ffect 3 255 255 2598ms 255 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 105 Effect Detail Editor Along the top of the Effect Detail Editor shows the name of the fixture that you are currently editing Only the properties that are available in the fixture are shown in the grid view If for example a fixture does not have any gobo control then none of the three gobo fields will show The Effect Detail Editor provides a convenient way to set a fixture property across the entire effect Clicking on the heading of a property such as Gobo in the above example will highlight the entire column You can then enter any value to apply it to all segments start and end states START OFFSET FIELD Use to field to specify a delay in seconds before starting this part of the effect This allows you to stagger the execution of the effect across all of the fixtures CREATING AND EDITING SEGMENTS The graphical view of the effect allows you to easily see when the fixture is doing something Each segment shows us at a glance that the fixture is changing state The software will automatically set up intelligent fixtures between segments to their next state hence we need not be concerned with fixture p
93. If a point is at the edge of the edit space it will not be moved Below the position control are the auto create buttons le ls Figure 116 Automatic Path Creation Controls Each of these buttons allows you to automatically create some simple and common shapes The first button will automatically create a circle the second a figure eight and the last an S If a path already exists in the edit window a confirmation dialog will ask you to confirm that you want to remove all of the existing points and create a selected shape The result of each of these buttons can be seen in the following three diagrams Once you are happy with the shape you have created you must commit it to the effect fixture you selected to edit the path Clicking on the OK button will remove the entire segment list for this fixture and add the new path The path will be a series of segments all connected to each other and will be approximately 200ms long Note If you set the elasticity of the path to 1 then a straight line will be created between points not a curve and the software will create _a single segment for each line Click on the Cancel button to return to the effect editor without committing the new path ADDING FADE IN AND FADE OUT TO SEGMENTS When an effect segment is created its default start and end state will set the dimmer to 100 This is known as a Snap on or snap off 196 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd R
94. LIGHTFACTORY USER GUIDE vV Copyright 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd Auckland New Zealand LIGHTFACTORY USER GUIDE The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd All Rights Reserved This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from DREAM SOLUTIONS LIMITED of Wilkinson Way Browns Bay Auckland New Zealand ALL EXAMPLES WITH NAMES COMPANY NAMES OR COMPANIES THAT APPEAR IN THIS BOOK ARE IMAGINARY AND DO NOT REFER TO OR PORTRAY IN NAME OR IN SUBSTANCE ANY ACTUAL NAMES COMPANIES ENTITIES OR INSTITUTIONS ANY RESEMBLANCE TO ANY PERSON COMPANY ENTITY OR INSTITUTION IS COINCIDENTAL DISCLAIMER Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual However DREAM SOLUTIONS LIMITED makes no warranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose DREAM SOLUTIONS LIMITED shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or the examples herein The information in this document is subject to change without notice LIGHTFACTORY SOFTWARE LI
95. MAC J50 Wode d Q Dimmer 0 Dimmer 0 Dimmer 0 i M14 27 K t9 E 43 a Controt Channet 271 Channet 3 ake 0 r d boe 0008 Ch hannat 77 Channet 40 Vate 0 remt hel Channet 22 Channel 11 Vave 0 sirote Channet 24 Channel 12 Vabe 0 azer Chennet 14 Chenr met 45 Chernet 16 Channet 17 Channet 18 Chereret 19 Chenne t3 Channe 4 43 VV TUsES Jae O ove 0 Vate 0 Vete 9 Veve 0 HOUSE LIGHTS VY Figure 48 Matrix Channel Display The above example shows a 6 x 8 cell matrix with fixtures defined about the outside edge This window works in almost exactly the same way as the grid view in the channel display You can select and control fixtures in exactly the same way as you would in the previous screen The same right click menu provides access to recording options You can open as many matrix displays as you want and lay these out on the screen for convenient access A matrix can have any mix of fixtures and is not restricted to conventional dimmers 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS SELECTION OPTIONS Channels can be selected for editing by simply clicking on the desired grid cell By holding the left mouse button down you can drag an area of the grid to select multiple channels or fixtures On the left hand side of the channel window are a number of options to help with channel selection Each of the options is described below
96. Pathport devices other than a working Ethernet interface on your computer PA Pathway Ts LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION INSTALLING ENTTEC WINGS 52 The ENTTEC Playback and shortcut wing is the perfect add on for LightFactory The wing is Ethernet based and many devices can be connected letting the user customise his or her layout as they want No special driver installation is required to communicate with Enttec wing devices other than a working Ethernet interface on your computer Firstly you need to connect your wing and the computer running LightFactory If you have an available Ethernet port on your computer you can connect your Wing directly to your computer using a cross over patch lead If your Ethernet port is already in use or you are using more than one Wing you will need to connect the computer and the Wing s to an Ethernet Hub or Switch using a standard Ethernet patch cable Do not use power over Ethernet hubs or switches Once you ve connected the Wing and the computer the Link LED should light up immediately If not check the Ethernet cable you ve used is the correct type ie cross over or straight through and is in good working order and the computer and hub switch are functioning correctly You may see the Activity LED blinking occasionally if there is activity on the Ethernet network Make sure the w
97. Release all of the fixtures regardless of what is selected ACTIVE Turn on the active selection option for channels and fixtures to automatically go to the ON level whenever selected The fixtures will also turn OFF if the fixture is unselected MODIFYING SELECTED GHANNELS Once a channel is selected you can modify its current dimmer value To set the current dimmer as a percentage enter a desired number between 0 and 100 As the number is entered you will see it appear in the window title bar The number entered will not apply until the enter or return key is pressed Once enter is pressed the number will be cleared from the title bar and the channels will be set The channel will fade over the time specified in the fade time field Note Corrections can be made to any entered value using the backspace key Use the title bar to check the entered value before applying To set the channel to a DMX value 0 255 enter a d before the required value In the title bar you will see the letters DMX before the value you entered Note After applying the setting press enter you will see the dimmer value displayed as a percentage corresponding to the DMX value you entered The current value can also be modified using the scroll wheel on your mouse if equipped This is a very useful way of controlling the dimmer of any lamp as its gives you a smooth control of the lamp s intensity By default eac
98. SABLE RESET To avoid accidental executing the reset function in the middle of a show check the Disable Reset option at the bottom of the window PREVIEW NEXT GUE IN WYSIWYG To help you visualise what the next cue will look like LightFactory allows you to preview it in WYSIWYG When this option is checked the WYSIWYG live display will be the contents of the next cue to the last one executed GO ALL Pressing Go All is the equivalent of pressing all of the Go buttons for all show runners at the same time RESET ALL Click Reset All to reset all of the show runners 232 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW EFFECTS RUNNERS EFFECTS RUNNERS LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Effect Runners provide a quick and easy way to access effects in an ad hoc manner Once you have created your effects See Effects Editor on page 177 to learn how they can be used either within cue lists or manually from effects runners Open the Effects Runners window by clicking on the Effects Runners button at the right of the command interface or by selecting it from the windows menu at the top New Effect Runner L k t atng an effect f g PAN TIL CAN ICAN F PANTER WAVE yl Elect Name can c tect Name wave Length 00 18 00 Playback 15 esr 00 03 00 Playback 15 oo 00 00 I gt tt 00 00 00 E G LE effects Runner a f lt j Independant PAN TILT Move New Effect Run
99. TURE EFFECT Provides the ability to build your effect by viewing its behaviour over a timeline The effect has a fixed length and each fixture can be given a specific behaviour over that time New Effect Builder Time vs Fixture Effect AAL Y Enter the name for this effect Timeline Effect length 5 00 Seconds A a Number of fixtures 3 Starting with i g OR Channel Range 37 9411417 Figure 93 New Effect Builder Timeline To complete the creation of an effect enter the name to identify the effect and set the length in seconds that you want the effect to run for Set the fixtures you want to include in the effect by setting the Starting fixture number and specifying how many fixtures after that to include Alternatively you can provide a range of channels using the command syntax in Channel Range field Click on Finished to create the new effect and open the effect editor The newly created effect will immediately become visible in the right hand side of the effects editor PROPERTY ATTRIBUTE EFFECT This effect type is based on time vs level path that is assigned to a list of fixtures and specific attributes or properties http www lifact com 179 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR New Effect Builder Property Attribute Effect Enter the name for this effect Sweepd E Effect length 5 00 Seconds Number of fistures 3 B
100. To specify a global delay before effects are started enter a valid time in seconds into this field TIMECODE When timecode triggers are being used this field will specify the timecode value that the software will wait for See page 101 for more information about timecodes 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS TESTING A SHOW The Cue List Editor window provides convenient controls to allow you run and test a show The four controls are the same as each of the 150 show runners and operate exactly the same way If the show you are working on has only one cue list there is no reason to use any of the additional show runners and can run your entire show from the cue list editor window For more about show runners see page 21 ae cms ante onde Figure 90 Show Editor controls for testing a show CUE GO This will execute the next cue in the active cue list If there is no current cue active the cue go button will execute the first cue in the list As soon as this button is pressed the cue will start and a cue progress time will start counting down the execution time Note If the cue is triggered by some external event such as a timecode then the cue go will override this and execute the cue immediately CUE STOP This will stop the execution of the cue immediately Any fades or waits will terminate and the current lighting
101. UIDE FOR USERS EXTERNAL TRIGGERS LightFactory provides the ability to connect external triggering devices to control the running of shows This feature allows you to set up shows that run without user interaction External triggering is designed to trigger the Cue Go function in shows however LightFactory can also use the MIDI and Timecode triggers to execute any shortcut Configuration of the external triggers can be found in the file menu MIDI CONTROL MIDI is a flexible musical instrument to PC protocol that provides a number of different messages in the form of notes The MIDI Control tab provides the ability to add any number of triggers to the system Click on the Add button to create a new line in the list of triggers To remove a trigger click on the row you wish to remove and click on the Remove button LE External Triggers ix ii PC Line In Timecode MIDI Messages Description Channel Device _ Note onoff Octive Action Shortcut D Hi Hat Start Cue 10 X 7G gt On 2 gt Shortcut 2 __ Hi Hat Foot Lead Spot 10 X v At v On 2 v Shortcut 3 Tom M End Song 10 X gt FH On i 4 gt Shortcut 4 _ TomLR Slow fades 10 bd GH On 2 gt Shortcut 5 _ Tom UR Faster Chase 10 X mC gt On 3 Shortcut 3 Add C Enable MIDI Control Figure 36 External Triggers Midi Control For LightFactory to respond to MIDI events you must enable it by
102. VIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTING CONCEPTS OVERVIEW 10 LightFactory is a unique PC based lighting controller that combines the best of traditional lighting control with advanced features only available with the power of a PC LightFactory was designed with the idea that every lighting engineer operator or designer could own his or her own control desk One desk they are completely familiar with one desk that works for every situation and one desk they can rely on every time Created by lighting designers for lighting designers LightFactory allows you to quickly set up a new venue without having to learn a new lighting controller or have budget constraints restrict your choice of desk With advanced features for all lighting situations from museum to stage shows LightFactory does it all Control over 32 000 dimmers with 10 000 channels Dimmers can be purchased in 512 dimmer blocks for a truly scalable system This user guide will take you through all of the features of the software and show you how to use it to its fullest potential 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTING GONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS CONCEPTS This section covers some lighting basics as well as introducing you to LightFactory s main concepts and computer terminology required to use the software LIGHTING CONCEPTS DMX SYSTEM DMX 512 is the standard protocol by which lighting control desks communicate with lighting equipment
103. Y CREATING A BASIC SHOW A GUIDE FOR USERS its row In this example we have chosen to leave this cue blank without any fixtures set There is no reason not to use this cue other than to have a blacked out state when the show begins Along the bottom of the cue list editor are the playback controls for the currently selected cue highlighted in green onde caseo ante coges Figure 21 Cue Playback Controls Press the Cue Go button and notice how channels 2 3 and 6 slowly fade from zero to their set values over a period of 5 seconds Once this cue has finished A counter below the cue window will count down the number of seconds remaining and display Cue Complete when finished click the Cue Go button again to go from cue 1 to cue 2 This time cue 1 will fade out then cue 2 will slowly fade in The current cue will always be highlighted in green and you will notice the green line following the cue execution active cue below the cue window When the cue is finished it will say Cue Complete At any time we can return to the previous cue by clicking on the Cue Back button and can stop a cue execution i e Fade In by clicking on the Cue Stop button http www lifacteom o 69 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE REFERENGE WINDOW OVERVIEW COMMAND INTERFACE 70 The LightFactory command interface is the first window you are presen
104. a LightFactory dealer If you purchased the keyboard from any other source visit the LightFactory web site to download the keyboard layout template and configuration file Figure 15 Cherry G80 1950 Keyboard To install the keyboard proceed as follows http www lifact com 57 LIGHTFACGTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION 1 Switch off your computer 2 Plug in the Cherry keyboard 3 Switch your computer back on The keyboard requires no additional drivers to operate and you can begin working with it immediately _ Note If an error message is displayed when the O computer is first turned on or meaningless characters are displayed on screen after the computer has been switched on please check to _ make sure that the keyboard is properly _ connected to the computer 58 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd QUICK START LIGHTFACTORY OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION A GUIDE FOR USERS QUICK START To get you started using your LightFactory system the following describes a few quick examples of controlling a lighting system Using the channel window Patching a moving light Controlling a moving light Creating a basic show When the software is started the Command Interface window is displayed and the system is ready to go On start up the software will interrogate your computer and look for DMX hardware I Command Interface DES In this example the Ble w
105. a luminaire in order to create a coloured beam of light Can be manually controlled or motorised and controlled via a dimmer Gobo A thin plate with a design cut out of it that can be placed in the path of the light beam causing a pattern to be projected Pan Horizontal movement of a lighting fixture Tilt Vertical movement of a lighting fixture Control Channel Advanced fixture properties such as strobe pulse light on off http www lifact com 15 LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS CMY Colour mixing Framing control Zoom 16 CONCEPTS LIGHTING CONCEPTS CMY cyan magenta yellow colour mixing comprises three filters that can be combined together in varying proportions to achieve a desired colour of light Different fixtures have different special effects available dependent upon the make and or model of the fixture LightFactory can support up to three effects per intelligent fixture Achieved via a set of shutters this enables the shape of the light beam to be altered The shutters can be moved towards away from the edge of the beam as well as angled to create non perpendicular corners Zoom is a way of controlling the size of the light beam It is achieved by moving the lens back and forward inside the fixture lris is a set of shutters used for controlling the size of the light beam Opening and closing the shutters allows more or less light through the iris The light intensity is decreased
106. a oh Witte M l jamm ion a D a fics 0 Fai Fome Chanrst Bi iranti file Fat Channet T Pameti C annet T Channek Pi Oh rm t 77 SSS SS LT Dkt Sat i Sheer Gee a ple Big lee c bargin Has ha i Fait fac BF F Pi i J ace Face Data 3 P etnave aa Auton himet Chianti Chainnen M0 Chantert IT Channet e fthenne m Ohaneet in r ij Lon Wiki Maga LAT Vins Eija LAT le See Lan Tiki Diis Lrt Ving iis Lan Wai Tihic L n Yri Fade Tie Hed Hew bet Med fur phra pli i p wie rh tie pi ae pP Tag P3 ei Ph VBa SS ul Page 0 000 Pade Do Pade O00 ech DD fade O i Pade Dt Prai O00 Figure 61 Channel Display with additional buttons visible http www lifact com 137 LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW CHANNEL DISPLAY Fixture 20 IVLS Arc B Add iets channels to group Ctri G fea fm Dimmer 0 0 ps RA 0 Add selected channels to group Snapshot current state Ctri Alt G fi evan Vaio z mb j Add active channels to cue Ctrl C 7 Diffusion Q 0 Control 0 Add selected channels to cue Ctrl Alt C J i Add selected channels to cue without dimmer Update replace cue with active channels Ctrl U Update cue with only existing channels Ctri Alt U Add currently selected channels to a selection shortcut Fixture 34 39 MAC 2000 Add selected channels to a palette Ctrl P Standarc Dimmer 0 gt 0 Xx 0 0 Add acti
107. ack Assigning a playback will disable the submaster edit as only one can be assigned to the runner at a time A playback relates to the Enttec Playback wing Assigning a playback does more than just utilise the intensity control of the fixtures in the matrix but also allows you to use the play back and pause buttons to run the effect Start Stop Shortcut Set a shortcut number to assign to the playback controls for this runner Pressing the shortcut will start the effect running Pressing the shortcut while the effect is running will pause the effect and pressing it twice within 2 seconds will rewind the effect to the start Override Effect Length Set this field to change the length that the effect will run for If this value is set to 0 the default length Set during creation of the effect will be used Loop Continuously Check this option to make the effect loop back to the start when it finishes If this option is not checked then it will stop as soon as the effect ends Step to points only Set this option to jump between points rather than tracking a smooth path When the effect is started the length of the effect will be broken up into the number of control points As the effect runs it will jump from point to point at equal time intervals http www lifact com 239 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS RUNNERS Stop at each point Set this option to run the effect more like a chase where
108. ack when using the media effect LightFactory Properties i System Database Settings Registration Visualiser External Wings Media Appearance Shortcuts Video Output Monitor 2 2 Brightness Contrast H ue 5 aturation Volume Utilized colours Reset to Default Figure 33 System Properties Media Video Output Monitor Use this option to define what display on your computer all video content go to If you only have 1 monitor or you select your primary monitor then the video will play ina sizeable window If you are using a secondary display the video output will automatically be played in full screen Brightness The Brightness property defines the luminance intensity Utilise Colour The Utilise Colour check box property defines whether colour is utilized or not Contrast The Contrast property defines the relative difference between higher and lower luminance values Hue The Hue property defines the phase relationship in degrees of the chrominance components Saturation The Saturation property defines the colour intensity in IRE units Volume The volume property defines the default audio level of the playback http www lifacteom 0 95 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 96 APPEARANGE Use the options in the appearance tab to define how the software looks on screen This provides the ability to set up the software to your own personal
109. activated http www lifact com 19 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS Group 1 Value 20 50 60 80 80 a 08 LOWEST TAKES PRECEDENCE If two or more channel groups are in effect together only those settings that are the lowest will be applied Example Channel Group 1 contains channels 1 2 and 3 Channel Group 2 also contains channels 1 2 and 3 but the two groups settings are different The table below shows the settings for each group and the result when both channels are activated Channel Channel Channel Resulting aa 1 Group 2 Value 208 80 O e 80 a ae on SUBMASTERS AND SHORTCUTS Submasters and shortcuts are both ways of accessing your channel groups easily A submaster is generally a slider on a lighting console desk that can be assigned to a channel group The submaster can then control the output state of the group A channel group shortcut is a convenient way of selecting a group through a single click or key press Once selected the group value can be modified by using the mouse wheel Submasters and shortcuts are both accessible via controls at the top of the Command Interface 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS I Command Interface File Windows Help Shortcut Page 0 4 EE Submaster Page wa Channel Display F12 GM Software is registered to LightFactory Software Gro
110. aiting for the Cue Go button to be pressed The previous cue will remain active until the trigger is activated To set the cue trigger click the drop down combo bution to the right of the field and select from the following options Cue Go The user must physically press a Cue Go button either in a show runner or on the show editor window Auto Cues set with the auto trigger will execute immediately after the previous cue has completed its delay fade in and dwell time An auto cue will not wait for the fade out time so that cross fades can be achieved Midi The cue will be triggered by an external midi event occurring See page 99 for information on how to set up MIDI triggers Line In The cue will be triggered by the line in audio source See page 100 for information on how to set up the software for audio triggers Timecode The cue will trigger when the specified timecode is reached If the timecode has already passed when this cue is reached the software will trigger the cue immediately Enter the timecode value into the field provided NEXT CUE NUMBER When this cue has finished wait fade in and dwell the next cue number specifies what cue should be execute next LightFactory will look into the cue specified by the next cue number and wait for the specified trigger to occur before executing it This field will only accept values of cues that currently exist ht
111. ake simple effects and chase sequences with the channels currently assigned to the effect http www lifact com 197 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 198 Auto offset Simple Chase 1 Simple Chase 2 Simple Chase 3 Random Chase Overlap Chase Figure 118 Auto create Effects Menu Automatically creating an effect will remove all of the existing segments and replace them with the selected option If segments already exist a dialog will prompt you to confirm this operation AUTO OFFSET Auto offsets are a way of setting the start offset values for segments to enhance the final look To offset the segments held by the selected effect click on the Auto Offset button at the bottom of the effects editor Auto offset Max Offset pmo Seconds S Linear Offset Saw Offset Wave Offset Figure 119 Auto Offset Options To cancel this operation click on the cancel button to return to the effects edit window To create an offset enter the maximum time in seconds that segments will be moved and click on the offset type required Below are examples of each of the four different offset types 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENGE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFAGTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Original Effect Linear Offset Exponential Offset http www lifact com 199 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE
112. and managing shows and cues When it comes to running a show the Show Runner window is used The Show Runner window is a simple screen that enables cue lists to be set up in the desired order defining the starting cue for each LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS 22 As the show progresses the lighting technician simply presses the Go button for each cue list group to activate each cue The display shows the current cue and the next cue so that the technician can see progress during the show To learn how to use show runners see Show Runners on page 227 CUES Cues define how the lighting is set during the various parts of a performance Using the LightFactory software they can run automatically or be user controlled A cue can contain a number of channels and defines all their states for a particular part of a performance One or more effects can be included as well as defining the fade times dwell and effect delays Cue can also trigger executing system shortcuts such as macro s and palettes Cues can be sub grouped into Cue Lists enabling them to be easily identified and managed See also Cue List s on page 21 CUE NUMBER Each cue within a cue list has a unique number known as a cue number When a cue is created it is automatically assigned a number CUE TRIGGER A cue s trigger defines the circumstances that cause a cue to become active There a
113. andard it is beginning to replace Aside from speed advantages USB devices can be connected or disconnected without the need to restart the computer Many USB devices can work on either a Windows 98 PC or a Mac provided the device manufacturer offers connectivity software for both computer systems Many of the latest digital cameras offer USB as well as serial connections LightFactory uses a USB device to transmit and receive DMX data ETHERNET A very common method of networking computers in a LAN using copper cabling Ethernet will handle about 10 000 000 bits per second and can be used with almost any kind of computer LightFactory can communicate with DMX systems using standard DMX over Ethernet protocols http www lifact com 29 LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLATION PRE REQUISITES INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY This chapter tells you how to set up a PC to run LightFactory how to install the software set up any required hardware and run LightFactory for use in any lighting situation INSTALLATION PRE REQUISITES Before installing LightFactory you need to ensure your PC meets the following minimum specifications Pentium Ill or higher processor Minimum 128Mb Ram 300Mb of free hard drive space Minimum 1024 x 768 video display Windows 98 ME 2000 or XP Operating system lt is also highly recommended that you attach an optical mouse with a working scroll wheel To produce
114. anges to take effect Network Interface When using any of the Ethernet based protocols you may need to configure the network interface that the software will use to communicate with the DMX system By default the system will be set to output to all available network interfaces however if you want to restrict the output to a specific device use the Network Interface drop down provided The network interfaces are identified by the IP address that it is bound to Number of desk channels When the software is first installed it will create 500 desk channels to patch fixtures into If you require more channels in the system you can add them using this edit box The system supports up to 30 000 channels but you should only create the number you think you will use The more channels you create the longer the software will take to start and the more memory it will use during operation Max DMX Universes This option will define how many DMX universes the software will attempt to communicate with The system will limit the number of universes depending on the registration code and license you have purchased In Universe If you select the Enttec Pathport or ArtNet protocols for use as input into LightFactory you will also need to specify the DMX http www lifact com 83 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 84 universe that will be used Enter this value into the spin edit provided only visi
115. any of the values excluding fields flagged n a in the right hand grid click into the field and enter the desired value All values are DMX values and must be in the range 0 255 Some fields can also accept decimal values for fixtures that support 16 bit resolution The fields pan tilt control colour and gobo also provide assistance through drop down menus To access any of these click on the button to the right of the field In the example below the gobo field allows you to select from images of the fixtures gobo s 4 Step 0004 Channel Dimmer Pan Tilt Control Colourl Gobo 1 Focus Effect Effe _ 10 255 gt n a n a Hn v n a n a n a gt n a gt na 11 255 n a n a n a 7zi n a v n a 7 n a gt n a n a 12 255 gt n a n a n a y n a zina 7 n a gt n a gt n a P49 MAC 2500 0 00 0 00 0 7 0 i 10 10 __ 50 MAC 250 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 0 gt 0 10 51 MAC 254 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 0 10 10 _ 52 MAC 250 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 7 0 10 10 __ 53 MAC 250 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 0 10 10 54 MAC 250 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 0 10 10 __ 55 MAC 25C 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 0 0 10 _ 56 MAC 250 0 gt 0 00 0 00 0 0 10 10 lt 30 bpm p D Show dimmer values lt lt Toeps Loop MP il Figure 102 Drop down menu for gobo control To edit an entire column of values e g If you want to set the gobo for all fixtures in the cue click on the column ti
116. ara ROERNE 226 SHOW RUNDET S irsana ANO Ea E AO aE aE E E 227 LIGHTFACTORY CONTENTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTING CONCEPTS Playback Gontrol BuilonS 14 3 iia eet ee 229 Shortcuts and SuOMAste ls anea a 230 OPIO aces eet 232 EITeClS RUNDES fac ecee es tecete rede erased a aaa aaa 233 Time vs Fixture Effects Options cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 GINAS CG ODNOMS ananin aiaeedestedeiansiiteresascaatactatetesy mann 236 Property Attribute Effect Options ccceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 237 Matrix EEC ODtONS srutra eater a N 239 Media ENEC ODUONS tronics tata tecanneltcaieteceelal 240 PlayDaCKOONTOIS ariera a A 240 M r EO OR csn aaaea aaa aa aaa A aa aai 242 Additional Commmand Sroa eae tireelee arenes 243 Level Group ENON szron aa aa Oair 244 PACES ie aaa o ea aE EE 246 LightFactory ReEMOt cccccsscssscssseesseeeseeeeeeseeneeenesees 248 stalling LFREMOUC vassin ds diaries een tel ecto eed eet 248 Setting up LightFactory to use LFReEMoteE cccecseeeeseeeeees 250 TINGE Imena Cis caidiienn aries ened E 251 LFRemote in a wireless CNvirONMent ccccccsesseeseesseeeeseeeeeeneeeees 251 USING LF REMOTE iina aa aE aa tec 252 CGONNECUNG naien a de eh ee 252 Eritering Commands enana E ess 255 Entering Attribute Property commandS ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 RUMIN CUCS na a E lets 256 FACING MACIO S ura A 257 DMO Ae er a ere ene ere 258 Pa estes a t
117. asae acetates E E E 258 SUITING DOW ain aaa r wanted cdeebaactetes 258 NINO X EE E N E E E N E E EE 259 4 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd TABLE OF FI LIGHTING GONCEPTS GURES LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS TABLE OF FIGURES Figure 1 Patching Multiple Dimmers per Channel 13 Figure 2 Default Channel Characteristic sssseseeseeeeeeeeeeees 14 Figure 3 Example Channel Characteristic 1 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 14 Figure 4 Command Interface Submasters and Shortcuts 21 Figure 5 Unregistered System SCTreen cccccssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 Proure 6 Resistratiom SCEE ienn cancer tn uiaa aereeicens 35 Figure 8 Properties Window Registration Page c ccceeeee 36 Figure 9 Registration WIndOW cccccccccccceeceeeeeessseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3I Brewre 10 SC On vert CiConse essien a 39 Figure 11 Registration Transfer nenoras E 40 Preure 12 iro hCPactory Fire serrr N 43 Figure 13 System Properties Wing Configuration 53 Figure 14 ipconfig shell command output ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 Figure 15 Cherry G80 1950 Keyboard cc ceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 Figure 17 Dimmer Patching Window ccssssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 62 Figure 18 Channel View window showing fixture properties 64 Figure 19 Show Editor Window cccccccccccccsnssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeees 67 Figure 20 Basic Show Exampl
118. asily identify the runner By default this will be set to the same as the effect name but can be changed as desired To set the effect to the runner select the effect group from the FX Group drop down edit field As soon as a valid group is selected the effect field will become active Select the desired effect from the dorp down list and the effect runner will become active Depending on the type of effect you have selected different options will become visible Click on the Edit Effect button to open the effects editor and automatically show the effect assigned to this runner Exclusive Group When a runner is created it is automatically placed into the Independent group exclusive group 0 Effects contained in the independent group will run independently and can all be run at the same time Setting an effect into an exclusive group other than 0 will make it exclusive Only one effects contained in an 234 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS RUNNERS A GUIDE FOR USERS exclusive group group other than 0 can be active at any time If you start another effect in an exclusive group while another is already running then the existing effect will stop and the new one Started TIME VS FIXTURE EFFECTS OPTIONS Description abba start Exclusive Group 0 A Independent A Submaster Playback j Start Stop Shortcut D Override Fx Length 0 00 Seconds
119. at the end of the cue list The cue number will be the next available integer value All of the properties of the cue channels trigger etc will be copied from the cue at the position of your mouse INSERT A NEW BLANK CUE BELOW This option will create a new cue directly below the cue at the position of you mouse The cue number will be exactly half way between this cue and the next The properties of the cue will be set to the system defaults INSERT A NEW GUE BELOW COPY THIS CUE This option works exactly as above however all of the properties channels trigger etc will be copied from the cue at the position of your mouse SET TRIGGER SELECTED CUES To modify the trigger setting of multiple cues select the rows you want to change right click and select the trigger from the sub menu You can select the rows by clicking on the very left of the row where the current row indicator is shown Hold the control and shift keys while clicking with the left mouse button to select more than one row If you have the trigger column selected then this menu option will apply to every cue in the current cue list TIMESTAMP NEXT NON ZERO CUE When working with timecodes it is often useful or convenient to create your cue list without any timecode values loaded Once you have created the cue list you must then go back and assign timecode values manually To aid with this operation LightFactory provides the ability to timestamp cues
120. atabase rather than as files on your hard drive The delete show option is used to completely remove a show from the database Warning This operation is irreversible and it is recommended that if you want to cleanup your system remove old shows that you http www lifact com 79 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE backup the database first See Database on page 85 for database maintenance options Note You cannot remove the current show from the system If you would like to clear all of _ the settings currently loaded use the Clear _ Show option in the file menu 1 Open the delete show dialog by clicking on the file menu and selecting Delete Show See Figure 25 Delete Show Figure 25 Delete Show dialog 2 Select the show you want to delete from the database and click on the Delete button to complete the operation or Cancel to exit this window Note Clicking on the Delete button will pop up a confirmation dialog to ensure shows are not 3 deleted accidentally SYSTEM PROPERTIES The system properties window can be accessed by selecting the option from the file menu Note Changes to these settings area pplied immediately and automatically saved into the There are eaight groups of settings that you can configure here each has its own tab 80 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW L
121. ation the segments will remain in the clipboard to allow you to paste segments to as many fixtures as desired This feature is useful after creating a moving light path to copy the newly created path to all of the other fixtures in the effect To do this create a path for the first fixture and then select the copy all function To create the path for all of the remaining fixtures simply paste to each one in turn See Create a moving light path on page 194 to learn how to create moving light paths CREATE A FOLLOW ON SEGMENT A follow on segment is a segment that will start immediately after the highlighted segment with a start and end state copied from the end state of the highlighted segment The default length of the new segment will be the same as the previous segment This feature is a convenient way to create lighting states that look like a continuous sequence If you would like a fixture to slowly fade between 4 different colours using the CMY colour mixing if http www lifact com 193 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 194 supported then you could create the first segment first colour fading to the second colour and then create 4 follow on segments For each follow on segment you only need change the end state to the new colour CREATE A MOVING LIGHT PATH A moving light path applies to fixtures that have both pan and tilt control and allows you to create a continuous movemen
122. ation of the software is based on the Registration Name Serial Number and the Registration Code The User Name field is optional and not used to authenticate a valid registration Enter your registration details and click on the OK button close the window A dialog will inform you if incorrect details have been entered and allow three attempts to correct the mistake before returning you to the system properties Note If you where previously using an invalid registration you will need to restart the software _ for it to begin communicating with DMX hardware LICENSE CODES If you received a License Code when you purchased the software it will need to be converted into a Registration Code to unlock the software A license code is a one time right to register your copy of LightFactory Unlike a registration code the license is not linked to your company name or serial number License codes use the format nnnnnnnnnnnn cccccc cccc where n represents a number and c represents a character You can convert license codes into a valid registration either online or using the Convert License Code option Both options require a connection to the internet If you are using a dialup connection connect to the internet before continuing with the procedures below http www lifact com 37 LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS og Solutions Limited Auckland New Zealand This
123. ault no users will exists in the system An empty user list Is the equivalent of turning off the security feature _ Note The software will not allow you to disable _the Edit Users option if the selected user is the last one with this privilege To create a new user click on the Add button in the bottom left of the window A dialog will pop up asking you to enter the name Once the user has been added you can enter a password and define the security privileges Most of the security features centre around allowing or denying access to the various windows within the software For example if you would like to prevent a user from opening the Cue List window uncheck the option to the right hand panel of the window The Record privilege is a special option that can be used to prevent a user from modifying the show while still providing access to windows like the Show Runners and Channel view http www lifact com 107 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 108 By default a new user will have all privileges enabled Use the Uncheck All to remove all access to the user You can then add access to the user as required Once you have setup a user in the software the security will become enabled The next time you start the software you will be asked to login with a username and password vaN F Password Figure 41 User Login The user name will default t
124. ber into the relevant field and press enter A drop down list is also available on all of the shortcut fields to allow you to select the large Cue Go and Cue Back buttons on the LightFactory shortcut keyboard Select Off from the drop down list or set the shortcut to 0 to remove the assignment GO SUBMASTERS A Go Submaster allows you to manually control the execution of a cue This overrides the fade in and fade out values making them become irrelevant The position of the submaster determines the proportion of all channels in the cue Once the submaster is at full then returning the submaster back to 0 will execute the next cue This operation overrides all properties of intelligent fixtures and can be a useful way to tracking moving lights manually to follow someone on stage LEVEL SUBMASTERS A Level Submaster does not control the execution of the cue but simply overrides the channel values as the cue executes You still need to use the Cue Go button to execute it but unless the Level Submaster is above 0 then no output will be seen Example If a channel in a cue is set to 50 and the Level Submaster is at 80 then when the cue executes the channel will be set to 40 http www lifact com 231 REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW SHOW RUNNERS LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Changing the submaster while the cue remains active will also change the output of the fixture OPTIONS DI
125. ble if one of these protocols are selected DMX output will not be produced on the In Universe that is configured It is therefore best to use a universe number above the maximum universe count you plan to use for output DMX Frame Rate Some of the USB hardware also provides the ability to set the DMX frame rate Use this control to define the frame rate you want to use You should not change this from the default 40 fos unless requested to by our support staff Changing this frame rate may stop your DMX output from working correctly Mouse wheel sensitivity The mouse wheel sensitivity allows you to alter the percentage increment that will apply for each segment rotation By default rotating the mouse wheel by one increment will change the fixtures or groups by 5 Submaster sensitivity The submasier sensitivity option will determine how much the DMX value of an external or hardware submaster must change before it is registered by the system In most cases this option should be left at 1 as we want the software to register a change every time the submaster moves In some cases the external submaster can be set just between 2 values and the output may jump between these values continuously This is known as bouncing To get around this problem we can set the submaster sensitivity to 2 and the system will not update the submaster unless the value move by 2 or more Enable Telnet command line interface To access the command inte
126. bmaster Shortcut _ Toggle SC Snap Prop f Band General Was 2021 2 000 Override 0 0 Band Side Wash 25 262 0 00 Override 0 Blue Wash 30 31 3 0 00 Override 7 0 Breakup 35 36 3 amp 0 00 Override 0 0 0 FOH CJ 119 50 51 52 Override FOH Wash 60 61 6 House Lights 100 101 MAC 2000 Perf 5 6 7 0 MAC 2K Strobe 5 6 7 8 j Override 7 Red Wash 79 80 0 Override 7 Side Stage Left 90 919 Override 0 5 Special 98 9 Override 7 0 YL1000s 23 4 H Override 0 VL1000s Cyan 23 4 Override 7 0 YL1000s Magenta 1 2 3 4 Override 0 VL1000s Pan 1 2 3 4 i l Override 7 0 VL1000s Tilt 1 234 0 00 Override 7 0 10 10 oo oO a o o co GR Ga OLG ora oa n VL1000s Yellow 1 2 3 4 0 00 Override VL5s 13 141 amp 0 00 Override z on VL5s Magenta 11121 000 Override 7 VL5s Pan 11 121 amp 0 00 Override VL5s Tilt 11 121 amp 0 00 Override 7 VL5s Yellow 11 1721 amp 0 00 Override Yellow Wash 66 67 6 0 00 Override 7 oo co co co co co Go O 0al oa a Graj o amp A WADA WGAT AA DAWA AAA Wa AA aA A coco co Cc G amp G a oal Gra ana ce Select All Sort view by Unselect All Select Active GroupName Figure 73 Group Editor Channel groups are most commonly associated with traditional scenes or submasters however you do not need submasters to use channel groups A channel group is a snapsh
127. by using your mouse to click and drag the slide control or by typing a value in the edit box below the slider If you move the slide control the value in the edit box will change to reflect the new position and changes to the edit box will be reflected in the slide position http www lifact com 109 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE Bg Submasters Jog Submasters page 0 C Latch flash buttons Reset Widths 110 z 3 5 A 99 z3 ealas palaz ceo lo calas ceo celes o ceo lo tels fs 0 fe eo eo eo ee e Figure 42 Submaster window The Flash button at the bottom of each submaster can be used to temporarily set the submaster to full Once this button is release the submaster will return to its previous state Selecting the Latch flash buttons option at the top of the window will change the behaviour of the flash button so that you do not need to hold the mouse button down With the toggle option on clicking and releasing the flash button will take its position to full To return to the previous state click the flash button again _ Note If hardware submasters are being used you will also see the slide position and edit box value change to reflect the hardware Lecnseecveceecece seeeeences ceseeecaes seeeeeeeee aeeeeeesas sane PeOees GesSGEGEOS SSSEEERES SESEEEEEES SEGSEESESS SOSSEEEEES BESESEESES CEGSESERS ESEGEDEEED BEDGESEEES GESSSSDEDS CEESSSEDEE BEES
128. ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 Property effect path editor section cccceeeees 202 Edit path right click MENU cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 202 Effects Editor Matrix LED Effect ee 205 Matrix effect right click MeNU ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 206 Matrix effect preview WINdOW ccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 206 Effects Editor Media Effect eee eeceeceeeees 208 BITC CELA DEAR Y ca a eae ied taNaaiaka tees 210 Dimmer Patching WindOw cccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeees 213 Quantity control for intelligent fixtures 00 215 Flip Pan and Flip Tilt Options cc eseeeeeeeeeeees 216 PUxtuce ER G1OP censores a 216 Figure 132 8 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd TABLE OF FIGURES LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTING GONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Advanced Colour Wheel Properties eeeeceees 218 Advanced Gobo Properties cccccccececessseeeeeeeeees 219 Control Channel Properties cccccccceessseeeeeeeeees 220 Channel Characteristic Editor cccceeenneeeeees 22A Available default c
129. ccceeeees 98 External Triggers Midi Control ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 99 External Triggers PC Line Ut icievsctenctaccsatscestelaivieiess 100 External Triggers MIDI SMPTE Timecode tab 101 SCHE CULE Task Seaan cs emer a 103 USEF SECUN rnane 107 User EO Msa 108 S UbmMaster WINDOW crae a a a onset aaa se 110 ON Srem SMOLMCINS ea alae arucaratiies 112 A simple channel window with only simple fixtures 115 A channel window with moving lights patched 116 Channel view Layout View cccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeees 118 Layout view Move fixture s cciiescainiesineeneritweennce 119 Matrix Channel Display ssisctntoniitetaiiactoniniens 120 Intelligent Fixture Control cccccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeees 125 Pan and Tit Helpoin 127 Colour Wheel CONTIONS siccseacdssscussiavinsdetiaiocnciusseur chiens 129 Using the Colour Wheel Helper Control 129 CMY Colour Mixing and CTC Controls 0 130 Colur C NOOS Clg oe eetet ahahaha ene eae 130 GOBO CONOR eea cei seuaeteareteedew ee acecnseeu eee 131 Erect ONUO serris taairontnan E 132 Control Channel Control cc eeeccccccccecceeesseeeeeeeeees 132 Control Channel Functions ccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 133 Property slider Controls wisicneiiuietetcraisriaiienteedion 135 Channel View Quick Access Controls 000 136 Channel Display with additional buttons visible 137 Channel Window Right Click Popu
130. control the dimmer of intelligent fixtures follow the same procedure for standard dimmers Click on the Channel View window and either enter the desired value or use the scroll mouse to dim the light up and down 64 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd QUICK START LIGHTFACTORY CREATING A BASIC SHOW A GUIDE FOR USERS Note The fixture properties window can only control one type of fixture at a time If you select multiple fixtures and there is more than one type _ selected the window will disappear You can however select as many of the same fixture type and control all of them at once Standard dimmers can also be selected and will not be affected by property changes TESS CREATING A BASIC SHOW A basic show is a series of cues called a cue list each containing a specific lighting state or scene The transition between each lighting state can also be defined to control a fade in fade out and dwell time Note In this example we are not covering the use of the effects engine but only basic cues In the show we are going to create we will have three different scenes and will only use the first 12 channels The table below shows the three cues and their contents In this show the cues transition from a very bright scene to a very dim scene and then back to a bright scene again We have also use the moving light that we patched into channel 6 and placed it at a specific position PS 80 16 100
131. cue list and cue number that you want to add the channels to Cue Selection Cue List Group 0 Cue 10 00 Description Delay 0 00 FadeIn 0 00 Dwell 0 00 ts Fade Out 0 00 ts C Add Edit Multiple Cues Figure 78 Cue Selection Dialog 4 If you want to add a short description to the cue being created enter this into the field provided 5 If you want to add the active channels to more than one cue check the option Add Edit Multiple Cues You will then see a list of all of the cues in the selected cue list Click on all of the cues you want to record into so that a tick marks your selection 6 Select OK to complete this operation _ Note The cue selection dialog will default to the last selected cue list and the next available integer cue number To cancel the operation and return to the channel window click on the Cancel button ADD ACTIVE GROUPS TO A CUE This operation will work exactly as the above option with active groups groups with a value above zero added to the cue rather than selected http www lifact com 157 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR CUE LIST EDITOR To access the cue list editor click on the Cue List button on the command interface window or select the option from the Windows menu y l Hlc iin iStor oka Con Lisia Cuna ior Fame Arii D E
132. d interface Windows menu EFFECT GROUPS LightFactory provides the ability to create groups to help manage and keep track of a large number of effects An effect group is a way to collect a number of effects under one description To create a new effects group click the Add Group button in the lower left corner of the window A dialog will prompt you to enter a name to assign to the new group Enter the desired name and click OK or click Cancel to return to the effects editor To change the group name click on the name in the tree view to select it and then click again to edit Type the new name then press the enter key to save the changes or escape to cancel what you have edited Effect groups can be removed by selecting the desired group and clicking the Remove Group button A confirmation box will prompt you to confirm that you want to remove the group and all of the effects within the group http www lifact com 177 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR CREATING NEW EFFECTS To create a new effect first select the group you want to create the effect in and click the Add Effect button If no group exists in the system a Default Group will automatically be created for you As soon as you click on the add button the New Effect Builder wizard will step you through the creating process New Effect Builder This wizard will help yo
133. d name to highlight it and then clicking again to place it into edit mode Do not double click Type in the new name and press enter to save or escape to cancel Entire brands can be deleted from the list by clicking on the red cross _ to the right of the Add New Brand button A confirmation dialog will ask you to confirm this operation before anything is deleted To add a new fixture 1 Click on the brand you would like to add the fixture to 2 Click on the button labelled Add New Fixture 3 Adialog will appear asking for the name of the fixture enter the model number or description and press OK to create the new entry 4 The fixture name can be changed by clicking on the desired name to highlight it and then clicking again to place it into edit mode Do not double click Edit the name and press enter to save or escape to cancel A fixture can be deleted from the list by clicking on the name of the fixture and then clicking the red cross button _ to the right of the Add New Fixture button A confirmation dialog will ask you to confirm this operation before anything is deleted When a fixture is selected its properties will be displayed on the right hand side Each of the fields represent the offset from the fixture s start address that the property can be found A value of 0 indicates that the property is not available for this fixture The property offsets can be any number between 1 and 255 htt
134. d effect will immediately become visible in the right hand side of the effects editor Note This effect type requires the latest version _ _ of Microsoft DirectX runtime Please visit _ http www microsoft com windows directx defa ult mspx for more information SELECTING A DIFFERENT EFFECT To change the current effect being edited expand the group containing the effect and click on the desired effect name The name of the currently selected effect will appear at the top of the effects grid to show which effect you are working on RIGHT CLICK OPTIONS Right click on any of the effects for options to delete copy or to create an effects runner Pan movement JI LZ Scan at All PAN 10 F 3 Scan cross Ea 1 P Delete Copy Create So FX runner Figure 98 Right click menu options 182 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS SIMPLE GHASE A simple chase is a series of steps each containing a specific lighting state Each step can contain any number of channels each in a different state A chase can either run automatically or wait for a trigger before stepping onto the next state T effects Editor Show Elbects 36 z Channels aed Fimturea 1 Step 01 amp Common Eteris t a Charme me j ai P e 2mp ii 1 tee 3 Step 00 MeT a Se fel eal F RAE ASE Re p ri 5 is id ij e 10 1 12 ude itapal i Delt Seo Te
135. ded to the community by ENTTEC This DMX USB interface is based on the FTDI 232BM chip a USB to serial converter LightFactory can send DMX512 through these devices using the built in driver Limitations It is important to release that unlike other DMX interface devices the Open USB DMX hardware requires output to be generated by the PC and can be sensitive to the load and speed of the computer If the computer gets busy or is too slow you may experience unreliable DMX output We have tested these devices http www lifact com 45 LIGHTFACGTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE running only LightFactory on windows 98 2000 and XP without any problems on any Pentium 4 computer Obtaining drivers The drivers for the Open DMX USB Dongle are exactly the same as the DMX USB Pro device and can be found in the drivers directory of the installation CD or download from the Enttec web site http www enttec com dmx_usb ftdi_driver zip Installing driver on Windows 98 2000 and XP 1 Run the program vcom_setup exe before connecting any of the Open USB devices The install will notify you when the install is complete FTDI Driver Installation e l FTDI CDM Drivers have been successfully installed 2 Click on the OK button to close this dialog and complete the installation Connect the Open USB DMxX Interface to a free USB Port 4 Your computer should immediately i
136. dns brvcennsyiccoiaous 31 Starting LigntF attor ysna ian 33 Registration amp Licensing ssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 36 License COS Saaria a E A taacewtea cae 37 LIGHTFACTORY CONTENTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTING CONCEPTS Transferring a registration to another PC ccccccesessseeeeeeeneeeeees 39 Importing and Exporting Registration Detalls cccceseeeeeeeeees 41 Generating a new Serial NUMDEL cccccceeseseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 41 Transfer registration to NArAWALPEC cc1ssssceeeesseeeeeseeseeenseeneensensenenens 41 Pire SO MWe ONNE acai Shen cctiieiti dun iy toncsoduuteneddae tudioen toque aeaisanee 42 Installing DMX Hardware cccccsssseeeseesseeesseeeeeeseeseensseeeeenseeseennees 44 Enttec USB DMX Pro Dongle 44 Enttec Open USB DMX Dongle a a a 45 Soundlight Sunlite USB DMX Dongle cceeeeecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaes 46 Soundlight Sunlite USB DMX In Dongle ce ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 Artnet DMX on Ethernet omicida araa a aE 51 Entec DMX On EMernelooresnco n a A 51 Pathport DMX on Etherneta anna aaa 51 Optional Hardware installation cccccsssssssseeeeesesesesseeeeeseeeeeeeees 52 laStalling ENEC WINGS ciicnievetedsssvacit vis r E 52 Eroodex DA IMPULSY Te arnai neie E ie 55 AKOS eaea a 57 Installing Cherry G80 1950 POS keyboard cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 QUICK Stalla A 59 Using the Channel Window
137. dow then type ipconfig and press enter LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION 54 CID Sa yalom dA cmd ome CC Copyright 1985 2081 Aicroszoft Corp amp nttec gt 18 18 18 132 255 0 0 0 10 108 10 254 PARANA es Figure 14 ipconfig shell command output Using the wing The wing is automatically configured by light factory e Playback wing fader 1 on the wing is linked to fader 1 in light factory e Shortcut wing button 1 is linked to shortcut 1 in light factory Configuring the wing You might need to configure the wing to match the IP settings with the IP settings of your computer To configure the wing you can use any web browser such as Internet explorer Firefox Type in the address of the node in the address bar like this http 10 5 2 6 where 10 5 2 6 is the IP address of the Wing By default the IP address is 10 x y z where x y and z are the last 3 bytes the MAC address is in hexadecimal of MAC Serial number Eg For a MAC of 010203040506 the IP would be 10 4 5 6 You can also find the IP address on the label situated in the box of the Wing lt should also appear automatically in the External Wings window in System Properties in LightFactory if it is connected properly Once the address typed into your favourite web browser the main page will appear Status Page The main page is the status page it displays g
138. ds that the clip will play for before either stopping for playing again from the start position A play length of 3 5 will play for 3 and a half seconds each time it runs The system relies on the correct codec s for the media to be played back If the codec is not available on the system then an error may occur when attempting the playback There are a number of global media playback controls that can be set in the System Properties See Media on Page 95 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW EFFECTS EDITOR If you attempt to play a video file and have only a single monitor connected then the software will only show the video in a window on you primary display In a multi monitor situation the system will default to use the 2 display as the full screen output of the video clip http www lifact com 209 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR EFFECT LIBRARY 210 The effect library is a convenient way to save and recall your favourite property attribute effect Once you have created an effect it can be copied to the library and will not be removed when you clear the show e lt LO O O O OOOO E thiet Fetter aE Show L pi Proanp AEriafr Urmi Lites Merced Faia a F Pagey Legh Oi Di Gei Pa Tagger e E P Si yi es a1 afi Figure 128 Effect Library A library effect looks exactly the same as the property attribu
139. e Fade In Fade Out and Delay SENO Ssn a 68 Fisure 21 Cue Playback Control neee 69 Figure 22 Command Interface WindOW sseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 Proure23 Codd SNOW Galop ssrin a EE 78 Figure 24 Save SHOW dalot eee R 79 Proure 25 Delete SNOW dalon aone E 80 Figure 26 System Properties System tab ccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeees 82 Figure 27 System Properties Database tab cccsseeeeeeeeeeees 85 Figure 28 System Properties Settings tab csssssseseeeeeeeeeeees 88 Figure 29 System Properties Registration tab cccceeeeeeeees 91 Figure 30 Registration WndowW serseri 91 Figure 31 System Properties WYSIWYG tab ooe 93 Figure 32 System Properties External WingS cccceeeeeeees 94 Figure 33 System Properties Media 0 ccecssssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 LIGHTFACGTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 6 TABLE OF FIGURES LIGHTING CONCEPTS System Properties Appearance ccccceessseeeeeeeeees 96 System Properties Special Shortcuts cc
140. e 12 ao bom Cire C Show dimmer values a percentage Remove step DetetfateTie 10 2 lt Add Charnala er ee ee 5 Step Sco amama SSS Che Aimee Group Remove ect C Lowe CIC ee Figure 99 Effect Editor Simple Chase Each step can be renamed by clicking on the name and typing the new description Clicking on each step will show the details in the right hand side To add a new step click on the Add Step button found below the Step list New steps will always be added to the end of the list To remove a step click on the entry you want to delete and click Remove Step A dialog will ask you to confirm the deletion click Yes to complete this operation or No to cancel Use the up and down arrows found to the right of the add step button to move the step up and down the order The default step time specifies the time waited before the next step will be executed If this is set to zero 0 then the step will wait indefinitely so that the chase can be stepped manually using the play control The default fade time specifies the time it takes to transition from step to step Simple chases will always cross fade between steps by the time specified in the default fade time http www lifact com 183 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 184 Check the live option to preview each step as they are edited As soon as this option is checked the current
141. e are contained in the driver directory of the LightFactory CD or can be downloaded directly from the Enttec web site http www enttec com dmx_usb vcom_ setup exe INSTALLING DRIVER ON WINDOWS 98 2000 XP Run the program vcom_setup exe before connecting any of the USB Pro devices The install will notify you when the install is complete 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE A GUIDE FOR USERS FTDI Driver Installation e l FTDI CDM Drivers have been successfully installed 2 Click on the OK button to close this dialog and complete the installation Connect the USB DMX Pro Interface to a free USB Port 4 Your computer should immediately indicate that it has found some new hardware and the installation process should start automatically If this does not occur then use the Windows Add new hardware or Computer Manager Win 2K XP option in the control panel to manually install the drivers 5 On windows 2000 and XP systems the driver for this device should be installed automatically and with only subtle warning balloons popping up in the task bar Finally a message saying your new hardware it setup and ready to use will be displayed Once you have seen this message then you are ready to start using the interface and you will not need to do anything further ENTTEG OPEN USB DMX DONGLE The open DMX USB hardware solution provi
142. e available channels Figure 76 Group channel selection splitter bar VALUE This is the current output state of the group and is a percentage value between 0 and 100 This value can be set directly by entering a number into the field or using the up down buttons provided The resulting output of each of the channels will be determined by the max value for each of the channels included When the value field of a group is greater than 0 the row of the grid will highlight green Unless the entire row is selected The value field can also be modified by selecting the row click the grey box at the far left of the row and using the mouse wheel to raise and lower the value The value will be incremented by a percentage set in the system properties see System Properties on page 80 By default the value will increment or decrement by 5 with each turn of the wheel Note If a submaster is assigned the value will directly reflect its current position and will change in real time with the control The value field can be set using a Level Group To do this select the entire row click on the grey box at the left of the row then right click You will see a list of your available level groups Choose the one you wish to use followed by the level See Level Group Editor on page 244 to learn how to create a level group FADE TIME The fade time in seconds specifies how long the system will take to go from the cu
143. e channel window see intelligent Fixture Control on page 124 but all changes will be set to the selected channels in the Show Channel Select window Multiple rows can also be selected by clicking on the channel number field and dragging the mouse over the channels you want 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS This is useful for selecting a number of intelligent fixtures with the fixture property editor Pen SC H Ta caren ey Cocke ahn fh ive Cenk shaa Cia ahaa 1 E a Cran Magets eis Geobe 1 ita Gris J Figure 84 Show Channel Select window with Docked Fixture Properties To edit entire columns of values e g If you want to set the gobo for all fixtures in the cue click on the column title to highlight and enter the desired value To new value will appear in all fields as you type SETTING A DIFFERENT FADE TIME FOR EACH PROPERTY LightFactory supports the ability for each property attribute to have its own fade time for every fixture To avoid making the channel grid too large the fade time is set within the same cell as the value If no fade time is set then the channel or cue fade time Enter a separate fade time by typing it after the property value prefixed by the letter f The fade value is set in seconds with decimal values representing fractions of a second Examples 230 Property will be set t
144. e current active cue list Example rec Act 1 2 5 This will record the active channels into cue 2 5 in cue list Act 1 76 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS FILE MENU The file menu is at the top left of the command interface accessible by clicking on the word File with your mouse There are 6 options in the file menu Clear current show clears all of the current system configurations Load Show copying some or all settings of an existing show into the current show Save Show saves a copy of some or all of the current show with a new name for later retrieval Delete Show completely removes an unwanted show from LightFactory This is irreversible System Properties a series of options allowing you to configure hardware database default settings and change your licensing information External Triggers this feature allows you to set up shows that run without user interaction Scheduled Tasks Virtually all functions within LightFactory can be scheduled to execute automatically at set times Edit User Permission Use this feature to control access to various functions by a user name and password See the following pages for full details about each of these options CLEAR CURRENT SHOW This option will clear all of the current system configurations Cue Lists effects macros etc will be cl
145. e effect will run on the channels fixtures that have currently been selected Clicking the library item again will turn the effect off Effects that are currently running in the library are indicated by a check mark next to the name Click on the Edit FX Library option at the bottom of the menu to open the effects editor window When this window is closed the fx library menu will be repopulated to account for any changes you may have made Use the Restore fixtures on stop to have all fixtures to return back to the same setting they where on when the effect was started CHANNEL GROUPS Selecting a channel group from the quick selection menu will apply the values of all channels in the group This is the same operation as the shortcut function and will apply any fade times set in the group PALETTES Palettes will apply to any selected fixtures when selected from the pop up menu This operation is the same as using the shortcut that can be assigned to palettes SELECTION SHORTCUTS If you have assigned channels to selection shortcuts then the quick selection menu will provide a convenient place to access them 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS Selecting a shortcut from the sub menu will act exactly the same as using the shortcut itself For additional convenience the first 9 shortcuts can also be accessed by holding down the control
146. e from zero to 255 A value of zero means the light is off and 255 means the light is fully on By adjusting the DMX value up and down the intensity of the light increases and decreases DMX UNIVERSE A DMX universe consists of 512 DMX dimmers In the case of the LightFactory system this translates to one USB DMX box If more dimmers are required simply add another USB DMX box CHANNELS LOGICAL DESK CHANNELS OR FIXTURES A channel is a controller on a lighting console eg LightFactory that is used for controlling dimmers In the case of a simple light with one dimmer a single channel would control one dimmer More sophisticated lighting fixtures which utilise multiple dimmers to control various properties or attributes of the fixture such as intensity position colour etc are controlled by a single channel i e multiple dimmers are controlled by one channel LightFactory has up to 30 000 desk channels 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTING GONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING Dimmer patching is the patching of dimmers into channels This allows a single channel to control any number of dimmers In LightFactory this is achieved via the Dimmer Patching window See Dimmer Patching on page 213 to learn how to use this feature Channel Dimmer Patching is also done to define which channel controls an intelligent fixture i e a fixture that utilises multiple dimmers f
147. e settings Once loaded the windows that are currently open will re position to the settings saved in the file 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW CHANNEL DISPLAY LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY The channel display is your primary access to fixtures and lights You may want to skip ahead and read the section on Intelligent Fixture Control starts on page 124 before continuing to set up any moving intelligent lights in your DMX chain In the channel display you can gt gt MH Select and modify the dimmer of each channel Select and modify properties attributes of intelligent fixtures e g moving lights Set a the default fade time for changes to the dimmer Add channels to a channel group see page 138 Add channels to cue list see page 140 Add channels to a selection shortcut see page 142 Add channels to palettes see page 143 Create simple chase effects see page XX Load the values of selected channels from a cue see page XX Change the channel view from Expanded to Compact view Select all unselect all select active select inactive undo the last selection or invert the selection Change the selection mode from inclusive to exclusive Figure 44 A simple channel window with only simple fixtures http www lifact com 115 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY H channel Display Se x
148. eared and left in their default state http www lifact com 77 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE LOAD SHOW When you start up LightFactory the current show will be loaded automatically Any operation done must always be on this internal show Loading a show is the process of copying all of the settings of a selected show into the current show Note LightFactory always has the current _ show loaded All changes made to the system _ such as creating a new cue or effect is _automatically saved to the current show LightFactory provides the means to select which parts of a show you would like to load You may for example want to only load the effects from a previous show into the current configuration 1 Open the load show dialog by clicking on the file menu and selecting Load Show See Figure 23 Show name Load Channel State Load Channel Patch Load Channel Characterstic Load Show Group Load Level Groups Load Cues Load FX Sequences Load Macros i Cancel Figure 23 Load Show dialog 2 Select the show you want to load from the drop down field at the top of the window Each of the tick boxes below it allow you to specify which items of the show you would like to load into the current show 3 Click on the Load button to complete this operation or click Cancel to return to the current show SAVE SHOW Saving a LightFactor
149. ect the cue list Dwell 0 00 and cue number to add these channels o Enter the number 1 into the box labelled ane Cue press the OK button The cue has canca now been recorded with the active channels in their current state GREATING CUE 2 66 1 2 Select channels 2 and 3 and set their value back to zero Now select channels 1 7 and 11 and set all their values to 20 Click on the Unselect All button and then click on channel 6 only Bring its intensity back to 30 by either typing 30 on your keyboard or using the scroll wheel In the Channel Fixture Properties window set the new position that you want the fixture in for cue 2 Now that the second scene is set right click and select Add active channels to a cue from the resulting pop up menu 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd QUICK START LIGHTFACTORY CREATING A BASIC SHOW A GUIDE FOR USERS Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcut control c to perform the same operation 6 Inthe resulting cue selection dialog cue 2 should already be set in the Cue edit box If this is not the case enter the number 2 and press the OK button CREATING CUE 3 1 Click on the DBO button to reset all channels back to dimmer levels of 0 2 Double click on channel 8 to bring it up to 100 Unselect channel 8 and select channel 9 Set the value of channel 9 to 80 4 Now that the third scene is set rig
150. effect will immediately become visible in the right hand side of the effects editor MATRIX LED EFFECT The matrix effect is specifically designed for use with large arrays of lights such as LED fixtures New Effect Builder Matrix Effect SSRN Enter the name for this effect Vert LED colour sweep Matrix Definition New Maxtris v Figure 96 New Effect Builder Matrix Effect To create a matrix effect you must have already defined the fixture matrix in the dimmer patching window See Edit Matricis Page 224 To complete the creation of an effect enter the name to identify the effect and set the light matrix that you want to use Click on Finished to create the new effect and open the effect editor The newly created effect will immediately become visible in the right hand side of the effects editor MEDIA PLAYBACK EFFECT Use the media playback effect to play simple video and auto files directly from with LightFactory http www lifact com 181 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR New Effect Builder Media Playback A W Enter the name for this effect Door Bell Media Type Audio File v Figure 97 New Effect Builder Media Effect To complete the creation of an effect enter the name to identify the effect and set the media type that you want to use Click on Finished to create the new effect and open the effect editor The newly create
151. elease all channels not being controlled by cues before running the next cue Snap Palettes To ensure that palettes do not apply the set fade time check this option Un patch channels when clearing the show By default when shows are cleared the channel patching is reset to 1 1 and all intelligent fixtures removed If this option is checked all channels are un patched Channel Group shortcuts to immediately apply settings By default this option is turned on and allows you to press a Channel Group shortcut and have all of the channels set to the value in the group immediately If this option is not turned on then pressing the shortcut will select the Channel Group Disable double click in channel view Double clicking on a channel in the Channel View will toggle the state of the channel Check this option to disable this behaviour 89 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE Apply virtual tracking if fixture does not exists in previous cue When tracking between cues where the outgoing cue does not contain the fixture you may want the system to assume a virtual fixture exists in the outgoing cue The virtual fixture will have all values set to zero Any zeroed attributes in the incoming cue will not be applied as the system will assume no change has occurred Don t record parked channels By default parked channels are recorded into cues If you do not want parked c
152. eneral information about the wing 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION A GUIDE FOR USERS DHCP Enable Ticking this box will enable DHCP configuration of the IP address You must have a DHCP server running on your network for this to work If not the node will wait for 60 seconds for a response then use the pre configured IP address During the DHCP timeout no DMX is sent or received IP This is the IP address that is used if DHCP is disabled Saving your settings When you make a change to any setting make sure you click on the update setting button on the bottom of the page The change will take effect ENTTEC Wing User Manual 10 immediately but is not saved in non volatile memory To save the changes permanenily click on the SAVE link in the menu ERGODEX DX INPUT SYSTEM The DX1 Input System includes a Pad a removable Tray 25 numbered Keys with a storage tray pre printed labels an installation CD and a Quick Start Guide The Pad connects to the computer via a USB cable The pad contains two buttons The button next to the Ergodex icon brings up the software at a single touch The second button is a Record Button which allows Macros to be assigned to Ergodex Keys Ergodex Manager is the program that allows the DX1 Input System to work with your computer It is responsible for storing all of your Macros and Key assignments for each program that you use wit
153. ent of any submission to mediation Vi 8 4 1 the mediator will not be acting as an expert or as an arbitrator 8 4 2 the mediator will determine the procedure and timetable for the mediation and 8 4 3 the parties will share equally the cost of the mediation 8 5 The Licensee agrees that it will not issue any legal proceedings against DSL relating to any dispute unless the Licensee has first taken all reasonable steps to comply with clause 8 4 Nothing in this Licence will prevent DSL from taking any steps it deems in its sole discretion necessary or desirable to protect its intellectual property rights or otherwise to enforce any of its rights under this Licence 8 6 If any provision of this Licence is or becomes invalid or unenforceable that provision will be deemed deleted from this Licence The invalidity of unenforceability of that provision will not affect the other provisions of this Licence all of which will remain in full force and effect to the extent permitted by law Subject to any modifications made necessary by the deletion of the invalid or unenforceable provision Vil CONTENTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTING CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS CONTENTS COMEN een ee eee ee eee er ee R 1 TADIC OF PIQUICS sspe saias aaa aana aAA E ERENS 5 OvervVieW s sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen nnnm 10 CONCEDII sosie 11 LIONUNOCONCEDIS arriomcid iaa E Ea 11 DMA SYSIE ei a E E cat sneccrceseetaal te taaes 11 C
154. ep is simply transferring the CAB file to the Windows Mobile Pocket PC The file LFRemote cab can be found on your installation CD or downloaded from the following web address http msearancke fileburst com LFRemote cab To begin connect the Pocket PC to your Windows PC using a USB cable or cradle Allow the synchronization process to complete Inside ActiveSync click the Explore button on the toolbar aok w Other Places My Windows Business My Music Mobile Based 4 My Computer Device My Documents oO B G Shared Documents i My Network Places My Pictures Personal Templates The Explore feature of ActiveSync is very useful it provides access to the files stored on your Pocket PC or smartphone from Windows With the Mobile Device screen open on your desktop left click on the CAB file and drag it to the Mobile Device screen then let go of the mouse button Step 2 Install the CAB File s Software Now that the CAB file has been copied to your Windows Mobile device we re ready to install the program On your mobile device click Start gt Programs gt File Explorer If you followed the http www lifact com 249 LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS SETTING UP LIGHTFACTORY TO USE LFREMOTE instructions above and moved the file to the root Mobile Device window navigate to the My Documents folder My Documents Name L Business L My Music I My Pictures i Personal
155. er of labels and associated DMX value To open the level group editor go to the Command Interface window and click on the Extras button Select Level Group Editor from the pop up menu This can also be found under the windows menu of the command interface BG Level Groups Level Description Shortcut E Colour Scroller a Level Group 1 Add Group Add Dimmer Level Remove Dimmer Level Figure 151 Level Group Editor A new group can be created by clicking on the Add Group button and removed with the Remove Group button To change the default name of the group click on the field and type the new name When you exit the field the changes will be saved or press escape to cancel Add new dimmer levels to the current group by clicking on the Add Dimmer Level button To remove click on the row to be deleted and then click the Remove Dimmer Level button The description field is the label that will be seen when selecting from either the channel or group window while the Value is what will be applied when selected 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY LEVEL GROUP EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Note The Value must be a DMX value between 0 and 255 When you use the Level _ Group in the Channel Display or the Group Editor the value will display as a percentage To apply the changes you have made close and reopen the channel window Channel Display
156. ere are two elements in this effect the first is a sin wave working on the pan property and the second is a cos wave on tilt For each property you want to apply a path to you need to create a separate entry in the items table In the above example 2 entries are required to create a circle with the fixtures The first entry controls the pan property and the second the tilt If the desired effect was a ballyhoo we might only require one entry applying a wave to the tilt property To add an entry in the items table simply click on the Add Item or Copy Item button This will create a new line with either blank values or the same values as the previous line To delete a entry click on the Remove Item button CHANNELS FIXTURES This is a simple list of fixtures that the path and property will operate on You can use the same channel syntax as the command interface to enter the channel list 200 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS If you right click on the channel list cell you can add or remove channels from the selection shortcuts The popup menu will provide options to add replace or remove channels Each submenu will display the selection shortcuts already setup in the system Replace f 3 10 1 i 16 Remove A Figure 121 Prop effect channel list menu PATH The path is the key to this type of effect as it defines exactly
157. ered the shortcut will automatically be assigned and become active There are 100 shortcuts per page and 100 pages beginning at 0 of shortcuts Use the page number as the first digit followed by the submaster you want to assign To access the submasters the first page page 0 simply enter the number between 1 and 99 note that shortcut 0 is reserved For the second page page 1 enter submasters 100 through to 199 To learn how to use a shortcut once it has been set up see Shortcut Options on page 111 TOGGLE SHORTCUT The toggle shortcut can be used to switch the group on or off Pressing the assigned shortcut will cause the group to switch to toggle between full and zero If a fade time is set for the group it will be applied to the operation To assign a toggle shortcut to a channel group enter a valid shortcut number into this field Once entered the shortcut will automatically be assigned and become active SNAP PROPERTIES When Snap Properties is checked intelligent fixtures properties will immediately snap to their maximum value as soon as the group value is raised above 0 http www lifact com 155 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR If this option is not selected the value of the properties will operate the same as the dimmer and will rise and fall as a proportion of the group value OPTIONS SELECT ALL UNSELECT ALL To select all of the groups click on the
158. erty effect path editor section Once you have created a new path you can edit it by simply clicking inside the window and dragging points where you want them If no point exists where you have clicked a new point will be created To move an existing point click on it and holding the mouse down drag it to the desired position The right click menu can be used to delete any of the points or to set the value more precisely Use Match start point or Match end point to set the value of the point to the same as the start or end points To set the value to an exact value between 0 and 255 select Set point to exact value Delete Point Match Start Point 26 Match End Point z Set point to exact value nama n Figure 123 Edit path right click menu PROPERTY This value specifies the attribute or path of each of the fixtures that values will be applied to If the fixture does not support the selected property then any applied values will be ignored LENGTH The length specifies how long the path will play for The length of the effect is the length of the longest item If the length of an item is less than the longest path then the speed that the path will play is made proportionally faster In the above example the pan property is set to 2 seconds while the tilt is set to 8 seconds The effect will 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS
159. es not have to control the dimmer at all If the dimmer is selected this option will record the current state of the channels as the maximum value that a channel will reach when the group is at 100 Likewise with each of the attributes that are recorded http www lifact com 139 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY As the group s value travels from 0 to 100 the channel s output value is the proportion of its set maximum By default all fixture properties will operate the same way Note An option in the group editor can be set to _ Snap the properties See Channel Group Editor on page 150 for more information ADDING CHANNELS TO A CUE Cues can be viewed by clicking on the Cue List Editor button on the command interface or selecting it from the Window menu For more information on cue lists and the cue system see Cue List Editor on page 158 and Creating a Basic Show on page 65 ADD ACTIVE CHANNELS TO A CUE Active channels are those where the dimmer is greater than 0 To create a new cue or add channels to an existing cue 1 Setup the scene as you want it to look and select Add active channels to a cue from the right click menu 2 The cue selection dialog will pop up to select the cue into which you want to add channels Set the cue list and cue number that you want to add the channels to p Rec Cue Act
160. es not obtain either under this Licence or by reason of use of the Software any right to copy the Software or any right to use the Software after the Licence has terminated 2 Licence 2 1 The Licensee is granted a non exclusive non transferable non sublicensable licence to install and use the Software for the Licensee s own internal business purposes provided that the Licensee pays the charges for the Licence as published at http www lifact com prod_pricing html 2 2 The Licensee is permitted to make one copy of the Software for backup purposes only 2 3 The Licensee will during the continuance of the Licence 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 33 2 3 4 2 3 5 use the Software only as allowed for under this Licence and will not resell rent sub license or otherwise make the Software available to any person or entity subject to clause 2 2 or as permitted by applicable law not copy decompile adapt modify or reverse engineer the Software or allow it to be copied decompiled adapted modified or reverse engineered by any third party or modify the source code or form definitions in any way not remove or alter any copyright or other proprietary notice contained in the Software effect and maintain adequate security measures to safeguard the Software from access or use by any unauthorised person and retain the Software and all copies of it under the Licensee s effective possession and control 3 Assignment 3 1 The
161. escription of the gobo can be entered in the Description field and will be displayed along with the image CONTROL CHANNEL The control channel provides access to special functions of the fixture Open this window by clicking on the small button to the right of the Control Channel property http www lifact com 219 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING 220 I Control Properties Property Luninaire Reset Lamp On Lamp Off Shutter Closed Shutter Open Random Strobe Speed 1 Random Strobe Speed 2 Random Strobe Speed 3 Random Strobe Speed 4 Random Pulse Speed 1 Random Pulse Speed 2 Random Pulse Speed 3 Random Pulse Speed 4 Figure 135 Control Channel Properties By default the control properties provide a list of features most commonly found Enter DMX values associated with the features or set the value to 0 if the feature is not available You can also add additional control properties using the Ada and Delete buttons provided The default list of control properties cannot be renamed or removed from the system and any attempt will result in an error dialog IMPORT amp EXPORT OPTIONS To make it easier to move fixtures between systems LightFactory provides the ability to export fixture definitions to text files that can then be read into another system To import a fixture click on the Import button provided A file dialog will appear ask
162. essing the up arrow will cycle _ through the last 100 commands starting with the _last command entered The down arrow will scroll back through commands you have passed _with the up arrow CHANNEL GOMMANDS All commands take the following format The square brackets indicate optional syntax Channels Property DMX Value fade Value http www lifact com 71 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 72 Channels A list of all of the channels you want to apply some change to Each channel is separated by either a comma or plus A range of channels can be entered using the word through or the forward slash symbol between two values Channels can be removed form a selection using the minus key If you enter a channel list only the software will select the channels in the channel view If the channel view is not visible it will be opened and brought to the front of your screen Examples 1 2 3 7 19 through 33 Will select the channels 1 2 3 7 and will also select channels 19 through to channel 33 14 2 3 74 19 33 21 Will also select channels 1 2 3 7 and channels 19 through to 33 with the exception of channel 21 Property This section allows you to access specific attributes of fixtures that you have selected By default the software will operate on the dimmer as it is assumed that all fixtures have this function Not always true T
163. f Wes Stace Lef Was Stage Len Was Sisse Lef Was Stace Lef Was maeb Len Waa Stsse Lef Was Stace Lef Was Stace Lef Wes fied Ned Res ro Aue chw oh eue roA chan C Actes vaire ON Vake 0 Vabe O j Vaiba O vibe 0 Vale a irmi ya 9 Vase 0 Coetiol Fase 000s Fote 0 00s Fade 0 00s Fase e 0 Jia Fade 0 00s Fase 0 00s Fes e 000s z Fas ma Fose 000s in Chasse 25 Channet 58 val re bal tae Stece Lef Wee Stace Lef Wee oy i mew fue Vate 0 vave 0 so Fade 0 008 Fase 0 008 GBG Geer anura Le fissure so Finare n Pisaura sd Ferture ho Fiatu ad k Pak L050 Sost VLNOOS Seat cc i i VN Sa OVO Seat o VON Sect VLON So _ amet te Erres A me GS Pleleave x 60 Y 42 a Y 0 0 weet Coeur 1 0 oeur i0 eo Flekeare d var var Tr a i T Macerta Macerta ewu eiw Gets 1 6 Gets 1 Goto IR bo ik obo 2 6 Gobo 2 0 Goto JR O00 Gets JR 000 Gba 2 9 Gabe 2 0 Geos IR Gado HE 0 00 Zoom 0 Zoom ra 0 re 0 Edoe 0 Edoe 0 Comtrot 0 Cortot 0 Strobe erone Focus Time 0 Focus Tire Comer Tree O f Cour Tene O ean Tew 0 Dean Tere 0 Dean Tere 0 ean Tew 0 Gobo Time Goto Time 0 Gobo Time 0 Gobo Time Fixture 98 Fature 90 Fitre 100 Feeture 101 Fissure 102 Fixture 103 Fixture 104 niga 105 Future 105 Fixture w Fixtures 108 MAC 550 Dasic M lt MAC 550 Basic MAC 550 Besc MAC 550 Dasic MAC 550 Basic MAC 550 Basic s0 Bil 5 B 50 Basic Dermer 0 D r O4 OM Dever 0 Denner 0 X YO x x X Y xoro x re Colour 1 0 Caw C
164. f 50 causes the resulting values from the path to be halved The combination of offset and scale can be used to restrict the output to a smaller range START POSITION The start position is used to specify the point in the path that will be used when the effect begins STAGGER Staggering a path is a powerful way to make an effect more interesting The stagger value either specifies how many fixtures http www lifact com 203 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 204 the effect will be staggered across or the percentage across the path each fixture will be A stagger number Stagger of 4 means that fixtures 1 through to 4 will be equally spread across the path so that each fixture starts in a different position Fixtures 5 though 8 will also be staggered in the same way so that fixture 5 will mirror fixture 1 and fixture 6 will mirror fixture 2 etc A stagger percentage Stagger of 10 means that each fixture will be 10 further along the path than the fixture before it If the total length of the path is 10 seconds then when the effect is at 0 seconds fixture 2 will be at 1 second fixture 2 will be at 2 seconds etc This results in the fixtures all working slightly different Making a number of moving lights all perform a simple circle can look good but then to add variety we can use the stagger feature to make each fixture start at a different point in the circle 2004 2007 Dream
165. ff 132 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW CHANNEL DISPLAY LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Control Channel OFF Luminaire Reset Lamp On Lamp Off Shutter Closed Shutter Open Random Strobe Speed 1 Random Strobe Speed 2 Random Strobe Speed 3 Random Strobe Speed 4 Random Pulse Speed 1 Random Pulse Speed 2 Random Pulse Speed 3 Random Pulse Speed 4 Misc Function 1 Misc Function 2 Misc Function 3 Misc Function 4 Misc Function 5 Figure 58 Control Channel Functions Figure 58 is the complete list of available functions that the control channel can be used for The values associated with each of these functions are set in the fixture editor of the patching window See Edit Fixtures on page 216 Only the set values will be displayed if one of these functions is not available then your fixture does not support it ADVANGED GONTROLS Control Channel Off Position 14 15 1 aH Frain Aot Fraim 1 Fraim 2 Fraim 3 Fraim 4 Angle 14 4 10 4 a 10 0 Y Dimmer Speed a Colour Speed Gobo Speed Focus Speed 1 sa oa Beam Speed Effect Speed 14 Tracking Speed x http www lifact com 133 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 134 To access the advanced options of a fixture click on the Show Advanced button in the bottom right of the window If this button
166. file dialog will appear asking you to select the file to load Click on the Open to confirm loading the registration GENERATING A NEW SERIAL NUMBER In a very rear case you may be required to generate a new internal serial number for the registration system You should only do this if you have been asked to by LightFactory support staff as generating a new serial number on a registered system will de register the software If you have been asked to create a new serial number by our support staff click on the button Generate a new serial number A confirmation will appear warning you that the system will become unregistered Click on the Yes button to proceed and a new serial code will be set in the system TRANSFER REGISTRATION TO HARDWARE In some cases it may not be desirable for the registration to be locked to the PC you have installed on You may want to work between several PCs but only require one to be registered at a time To facilitate this LightFactory provides the ability to move your registration to the Enttec USB Pro hardware _Note The software does not currently support http www lifact com 41 LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS TRANSFER REGISTRATION TO HARDWARE Once the registration has been moved to the hardware it is not reversible and you will need _the USB interface connected to validate your system _If you have several devices then only one will hold your registration
167. first installed CUE NUMBER The cue number represents the order that the cues appear in the list and by default it also determines the run order of the show Cue numbers can be set to any number you want by clicking within the field and typing the new value Cue numbers must be between 0 000 and 99999999 999 When editing cues it is not necessary to enter the decimal part if all you want Is an integer value 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Note LightFactory will automatically re order _the cue list as soon as you exit the field and thus save the new value The next cue value will not be changed if you edit the cue number so you must manually ensure that the show follows the desired sequence The most common use for editing the cue number is to insert a new cue between two existing cues To do this change the cue number to a valid number between the two cues Example To insert a new cue between cues 2 and 3 we would create a new cue and change its number to 2 5 To ensure that the show follows the sequence 2 2 5 3 we would need to change the next cue number of cue 2 to 2 5 and the next cue of 2 5 to 3 Note Changing the cue number can also be used to park a cue for use later To do this 2 simply change the cue number to a high value and ensure that none of the other cues have the _ next cue set to t
168. gistration information by clicking on the File menu and selecting System Properties Click on the Registration tab to display the current registration details r bmn LightFactory Properties System Database Settings Registration Visualiser External Wings Media Appearance Shortcuts Thank you for supporting the development of this product This software is license to User name not set LightFactory Software ce gt 6 _ Serial Number 688E5F2B50D88EC9 Online Purchase Save registration to file Hire Software Online Load registration from file Convert License to Registration Generate new serial number Edit Registration Details Transfer registration to a new PC Transfer registration to Hardware Figure 8 Properties Window Registration Page At any stage you can access the LightFactory web site by clicking on the LightFactory Online button or Online Purchase for quick access to the on line sales section of the web site To change the registration details click on the Edit Registration Details button to open the following window 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY REGISTRATION amp LICENSING A GUIDE FOR USERS Serial Number 688E5D2D50D88EC8 User Name LightFactory Software Organisation Registration Name LightFactory Software Registration Code Convert License Code Figure 9 Registration Window Registr
169. h Exclusive Group 0 gt Independent Submaster p Playback U Step Shortcut 0 Fade Time Sub Step Time Sub U lt gt lt gt lt gt Submaster Assigning a submasier to the runner will override the dimmer of the fixtures contained in the effect As the effect runs the position of the submaster will determine output of the fixtures A submaster assigned to a chase will also cause the effect to automatically start when the value is above 0 and pause with it returns to 0 Playback Assigning a playback will disable the submaster edit as only one can be assigned to the runner at a time A playback relates to the Enttec Playback wing Assigning a playback does more than just utilise the fader on the wing but also allows you to use the play back and pause buttons to run the effect Step Shortcut Set a shortcut number to use to step the chase Pressing the assigned shortcut will cause the chase to transition from the current step to the next Fade Time Submaster To manually adjust the fade time or transition time as the chase Is running you can assign a submaster that will control this As each step executes the fade time will be dependent on the position of the suobmaster The maximum fade time that can be set by the submaster is 10min Step Time Submaster To manually adjust the step time time between automatic executions of steps as the chase is running you can assign a submaster that will cont
170. h the DX1 It also monitors the currently active program you are using and switches to your assigned Macros for that program automatically Ergodex Manager includes an intuitive graphical interface to manage all of your Macros To install Ergodex Manager close all open programs and place the Installation CD into your CD ROM drive If you have auto run enabled on your computer the installer program should load after a http www lifact com 55 LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION 56 few moments If the installer program does not load automatically run Install exe from the Installation CD When the installer program loads click on Install Software and follow the on screen instructions to install Ergodex Manager During the installation you will be prompted to plug in your DX1 Pad When asked plug the USB cable into one of your computer s powered USB ports For Window XP After plugging in the Pad the Windows Found New Hardware Wizard will open If Windows Update is enabled you will start at Screen 1 otherwise you will start at Screen 2 Note Windows XP manages each USB port separately Windows XP will require that you go through this installation process each time you plug the DX1 Pad into a new USB port on your computer For Windows 2000 Windows 2000 will load the DX1 Pad automatically after you install Ergodex Manager and plug in the USB cable
171. h increment of the scroll wheel will http www lifact com 123 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY increase or decrease the current value by 5 This figure can be changed in the properties window See System on page 82 The and key can also be used to increase or decrease the dimmer of the selected channels THUMB WHEEL For systems that do not have a scroll wheel on the mouse or cursor such as tablet or pen based systems you can use the on screen wheel provided This wheel is visible when you have the buttons in non touch screen mode Click on this control and hold down the mouse button down As you move your mouse or cursor up and down the intensity of the channels will change in the same way as the scroll wheel DIMMER TOUCH SCREEN MODE ONLY When you are running the channel display in touch screen mode See Appearance options in the System Properties on Page 80 you will also see a button labelled Dimmer This is a toggle control to use the mouse trackball or touch screen to control the intensity of the selected fixtures Pressing the button once will disable all other controls and put the mouse into Dimmer mode In this mode the mouse cursor will disappear until the mode is turned off Moving the mouse up will increase the intensity of the fixtures and moving the mouse down will reduce the intensity Click again with the left mouse button to switc
172. h off the Dimmer mode DEFAULT FADE TIME The default fade can be set for all channels by entering a value into a fade edit box at the bottom left of the window Once you have set the desired fade all changes made to the fixture will apply over this time The default fade time specifies the time a channel will take to get from its current value to the new value Internally this value will be overridden by the show and effects controls so it is not necessary to have the default fade at zero when running shows TEXT SIZE The Text Size control for the channel display has been moved to the Appearance tab of the System Properties window 124 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY INTELLIGENT FIXTURE CONTROL If a selection includes only one type of intelligent fixture then the intelligent fixture control window will appear on the right hand side of the channel window See Figure 49 A GUIDE FOR USERS I Channel Fixture Properties BAR YL1000 TZA TI AI Docked Pan amp Tit Pan 26402 Tit 35577 3 kar Colour Wheel 1 Colour Wheel 2 I Channel Fixture Properties E Colour Wheel 3 VL1000 T A TI Al Docked Colour Wheel 1 Gobo il Colour Wheel 2 IS R 0 g Elfect2 Gobo2 Gobo 3 Effect 1 Colour Wheel 3 a 2 0 0 Rotation Rotation Rotation Elfect3 cic 0 Zoom _ Diffuser Iris Edge Focu
173. hanna 77 Charest 73 Chemat Ji Channa Pi Chamra JI r epis eat toh yani Gide Tgh yrim hg m e Ce ee ee eT pm tah rn Giga ost raed goen Sus Bi E z eee Tl a a va ii Wr 8 Veve 0 Hha ii ELLS a oe wat kemi Upis Tejp 2a Face 10h Face 0 tiie Fase 0 Ste Toon 20a Face 0 Ste Fejs DMa i Chancek TE Cheni F Pant Channeh 38 Dhamiri HI annmt ant H iame Fi DOhancert H Urge bag Seh giese aa J Sed fied Hrs and M teehee iber Chae HT P Jika g vir 4 ki why J esr 2000 Pate doa Fest Otai zai a F f L Aela Pariri Chanmai Of Chri Ue Chinnet M Charr 1 a Rear hpi vinai Rawr gh weal Rewer hgh enen Rear ihg h w Sea Rec Hes Ere pn a n ected ae ai Ditata _ Chn a Chermat d Chenet 44 Channei di Channet Ni Chemet 64 Chemnet 7 Chanmet Dharat Soli pe Thess opi Bipi ih ange r g pee ba nm rial Bagh rati Ape Pash ena Aa Peg eel Spee een eee Eat vel sf me a Jg Cena One Coma Dret Jip oe Cope ee Poa ol Hee Palir nie PL nha P Vales OG ei FL diha EA tne 24 Yat OM foe AL dakar 5s j Face fe PEE Daa FESE Uan Fuca Diba Fear ia PEE 0 Feie Ois Fase Dois Fer doh ema Drimia Charter 5 Chemet bh CPaerent f Charret fa Charter i C Parrett 4 Chant ba Dharert 3 Sias hgh w aai Raar iigh Bbi Rear ihag bki Depar hag j ei Disg Paper Wie Disa Gigai iia Dags Gage Wia Tisy gii Wia Area ee Pe Green fi E a UD ee r
174. hannel Select In the Show Channel Select window you can also override the cue s wait and fade time for individual channels If for example you want one channel to come up 20 seconds after the cue has executed enter this value into the wait time field Oy Note Overriding the fade time for a channel will always override the fade in time and will only override the fade out time if the cue also _has a fade out value greater than 0 On the Fight of the channel grid are the fields titled Pre fetch and Force Prop The Pre Fetch features only apply to intelligent fixtures When the Pre Fetch is checked the software will attempt to set up all of the fixtures properties before the cue executes If the fixture does not exist in the previous cue then all of the properties excluding the dimmer will be set when this previous cue runs When the light comes on in this cue the fixture should already be in the correct position and with all properties set colour gobo etc If the fixture does exist in the previous cue the software will snap the properties as soon as the previous cue ends 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Pre Fetch uses the fade in and dwell time of the previous cue as the time the fixtures will change You can also override this operation by setting a non zero value into the default pre fetch time fou
175. hannels recorded e g house lights you can enable this option Apply position changes to relative effects in real time This option only applies if you are running a property attriobute effect that uses the pan or tilt When you move the position pan or tilt of the fixture in the channel view it will move the relative offsets of the fixtures this moving the effect while it is running This allows you to see what the effect will look like in different positions before you record the effect into a cue Auto assign submasters with playbacks When selected this option will automatically assign the matching submaster to an effect playback Turn this option off if you want to use the submasters below the playbacks independently 90 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS REGISTRATION LightFactory uses a software license to ensure that the product has been legally purchased Without a valid registration code the software will still operate normally and no functionality will be restricted however the software will not produce any DMX output To enable the DMX hardware interface a valid registration must be entered whether at time of install or through the Registration tab in this window LightFactory Properties This software is license to User name not set LightFactory Software on S oes os e Serial Number 688E5F2B50D88EC9 cent
176. haracteristic curves cceeeeeee 222 PAtC HIS OPI ONS ceren T 223 ENEMIC Seaan ES 224 Dimmer Display WindoW eeeeeeeesssssssssssssseeeeereeesees 226 Show Runners Window sssseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 Show Runner Example cccceeeesssecceeeeeeesseeeeeeeees 228 Show Runners Cue selection c ce eeeeeceeceecee ees 228 Show Runners Jump to cue dialog 00 eeeeeeeeeees 230 Show Runner Controls Shortcut numbers 230 Show Runner Shortcuts and Submasters Editor 231 Effects Runners Window ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 Effect runner MOVE OPTIONS cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 234 Effect Runner Properties Windows cccceeeeeee 234 Macro Editor nesini E dies 242 Level Group BC Or seccinsea a alesse 244 Fixture Property SNOrtCUlS iscan 246 IevShiPAClOry Reno Essen ea a eee 248 Telnet command interface OptionS cccccceeeeeeees 251 LightFactory Remote Disconnected 0006 292 LightFactory Remote Connect Screen 0 253 Network Interface Properties Support 5 254 LightFactory Remote Main screen 00008 255 LightFactory Remote Example Syntax 299 LightFactory Remote Attribute List 0 256 LightFactory Remote Cue list i eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 LightFactory Remote Macro Selection 257 LIGHTFACTORY OVER
177. he bottom of each cell to display the level bar RESET CELL SIZE TO DEFAULT GRID VIEW ONLY To return all of the cells to their original height and width select Reset cell size to default from the pop up menu LOCK CELL SIZE GRID VIEW ONLY Toggle this menu item to enable or disable the ability to resize the cells SELECT ODD EVEN FIXTURES OF CURRENTLY SELECTED These options will only apply to channels currently selected and the first selected channel is considered an odd fixture Selecting odd or even fixtures will unselect those that do not match the criteria Once you have selected either odd or even fixtures you cannot then use the opposite option to reverse the operation as the system will apply you new command to current selection The best way to swap between odd and even fixtures is to use the Undo last selection option AUTO FAN SELECTED FIXTURES The Auto Fan function is an easy was to create some simple looks on stage and is designed to position moving lights The same feature can be used to create both fanned and crossed effects as seen below In Figure 70 below we see all of the fixtures fanned out across the stage and in Figure 71 below the same fixtures are crossed over each other in a two by two formation http www lifact com 147 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY Camar FOP faime Idin pa 2 En toon re tm ANNS ur e a Figure
178. he following attributes can be entered PAN TILT COLOUR GOBO GOBO R CONTROL CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW RED GREEN BLUE EFFECT ZOOM DIFF IRIS EDGE FOCUS STROBE Some of these attributes can accept a number following the command to access features where more than one of a attribute exists E g Some intelligent fixtures have more than one colour wheel If a command is entered with the word COLOUR then colour wheel 1 is selected by default To select colour wheel 2 the command should read COLOUR2 Example 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS To access the gobo wheel 2 on the fixture patched to desk channel 24 through to 30 we could use the command 24 through 30 gobo2 Note When fixture properties are selected the command value is always a DMX value i e O 255 You are not required to enter the key word DMX in front of the value Value The value you want to set the fixture or fixture property to If standard dimers are selected the value will set the dimmer to the entered value as a percentage of full Accepted values for standard dimmers can be any integer number between 0 and 100 If the selected channel is an intelligent fixture then the software will apply the value to the dimmer property unless a different property is specified Example 1 2 3 7 19 33 25 This will set channels 1 2 3 7 and channels 19 through 33 to 25
179. he next cue is triggered LightFactory allows you to add any number of effects and chases into any cue The FX Sequence field is a non editable field that will show how many effects the cue contains To edit or add effects to the cue click the button to the right of the field to bring up the Show Effect Selection window LE Show Effect Selection a EJ P Lorrrentonss Etinets Smole Chats s FxGeop Elect Delay Loup Ovens Length Fadein FadeUut Stagger Ou MAD Caries an ste 100 i 7 om gt oO Fomai Robucolun oath OO 4 b kb UW Uou uw F MACs ALs Cokes 00 7 v 0U E E a s100 gt Fawad bi included in cue Available Effects Figure 86 Show Effect Selection window effects On the left of this window is the list of available effects in the system The effects are grouped into a tree structure To expand a group and view the effects contained in it click on the small plus to the left of the group description The effect window has separate tabs for effects and simple chase s When an available effect is added to the cue it will automatically appear in the appropriate tab http www lifact com 169 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 170 Show Effect Selection Electi Sagie Chase s FeGroup linen Delay Owecton Fun imes Siep lene Fade lene Siep St Fade Sub Step Su Group 1 chere om gt i fowad t U gt 200 gt
180. he right of the edit space To adjust the start and end state of the segment click once on the bar to bring up a small edit window If the fixture is a simple light with no advanced properties the following window will appear Start State End State Mm Sil10 C DMX Val Figure 108 Segment Properties Editor for a Simple Light http www lifact com 189 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 190 In this case the only start and end state property available is the dimmer Enter the desired values 0 100 into the space provided As soon as you exit the window the new values will be saved to the segment To enter values as DMX 0 255 check the DMX Val box provided This setting will be remembered each time you use the software You can exit this window by clicking on the small X in the top right of the window or by clicking anywhere outside the window For intelligent fixtures the segment properties editor is significantly more advanced End State 100 th 4h 4h aha coc coco cocoo a Gobo 1 Rotation t Start t C DMX Val Edit Star EditEnd C Figure 109 Advanced Segment Properties Window As well as the dimmer the Advanced Segment Prop window provides access to all of the intelligent fixture properties Edit a property s start and end state by clicking on the appropriate field and entering a value between 0 and 255 _ N
181. his value DESCRIPTION This field is for your own reference and provides the ability to describe the lighting state contained in the cue By default this description contains the cue number This can be changed by clicking within the field and entering the new description CHANNELS This is a list of the channels included in the cue This list can be edited by entering the channels separated by a coma or a space To edit click inside the field and type the desired channel list or edit using left and right arrow keys You can also enter channels using the same syntax as the command window Example 1 3 4 10 20 15 This will add channels 1 3 4 and channels 10 through to 20 excluding 15 to the cue http www lifact com 163 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 164 The channels included in the cue can also be edited by clicking on the button to the right of the field This will bring up the Show Channel Select window This window provides greater control over the maximum value the channel will reach when the cue is executed and provides access to intelligent fixture properties l Show Channel Select a Yelow Pretetch Force Mop re TO PETT BUSSE iyi z Jaj PPro Sor kat uy un ans Sao M Ma Mar MAL MAL mac MAL MAC MAC mer Mi M Ms 6 Tw Ww worry oF oF o a hs F Edt Lee F Shon dimes vaim as peecrnitage Figure 80 Show C
182. his will start the same wizard you used to create the task Follow the same procedure to change any of the option or click cancel at any time to return to the task schedular window REMOVE A SCHEDULED TASK For scheduled tasks that are no longer needed you can remove them entirely by selecting the corresponding row and clicking on the delete button at the top of the window TEMPORARILY TURN OFF A SCHEDULED TASKS You can temporarily turn off or pause scheduled tasks from running using the pause button provided The status field will show paused tasks To turn a task back on simply slick on the pause button again 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS EDIT USER PERMISSIONS To control access to various parts of the software you can setup users and passwords from the Edit User Permissions window I User Security y use Name Password aS E is 123 Record Edit Users Edit Systems Properties Edit External Triggers Scheduled Tasks Channel Display Group Editor Cue List Effects Editor Dimmer Patching DMX Display Show Runners Effects Runners Macro Editor Palettes Level Group Editor Channel Selection Shortcuts Shortcut Window Submaster Window Select All Unselect All Figure 40 User Security Once a user has been added to the software the security feature will become active and require a login each time the software starts By def
183. hows the actual colour associated with the DMX Value column Click on the small button to the right of the 218 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS colour field to bring up a colour selection dialog When the colour field has been set the default name will be displayed in the description field Assign a DMX value for the new colour that will be used to reproduce the colour during a show The fixtures user guide should contain a list of the default colours and their corresponding DMX value GOBO CONTROL Like the colour wheels each of the gobo properties also has the ability to set up an association with the DMX values used Click on the small button found to the right of the gobo property to access the advanced options Click on this button to bring up the window below and assign images to the DMX values of this property Gobo Control 1 SEE Image DMX Value Description 0 Open r 2 radial dashes line of beams fan 3 dots offcenter dot fibroid zN AN Dats Rotation Offset Hi 5 s Loo A b 2 Figure 134 Advanced Gobo Properties Use the Add button to create a new row in the list of gobos or click on the Delete to remove the row at the position of the cursor Click on the small button at the right hand side of the Image field to bring up a dialog to select the gobo image from a bitmap file An optional d
184. ht click and select Add active channels to a cue from the resulting pop up menu 5 In the resulting cue selection dialog cue 3 should already be set in the Cue edit box If this is not the case enter the number 3 and press the OK button THE CUE LIST EDITOR To view the newly created show open the Cue List Editor by clicking the button on the right of the command interface LELE JAE Coe Lista Cure lor Groep D C Esah pipiak Secreted eens eet cera O Liked cue did eed Pari Cuan Lent Cue Lost Cubbie Ame Cua Dsreerietne Chira EBeoti F Chire Gitu Tig iiy Fetih Dral Fade Du FA Dei Ti E Si 1a ETF EJ rT arr an _ a TERA Cus ii Bod Cia Li Aijt Dns Coe OH Coe 1 4 i Cus Sis Cie Back Cus Fiai Hence Combat Pieca Cum Figure 19 Show Editor Window This window will show the three cues we just created and we will see in the channel field the fixtures we selected LIGHTFACTORY QUICK START A GUIDE FOR USERS CREATING A BASIC SHOW SETTING THE TRANSITION BETWEEN CUES In this example we have decided to apply the following transition between each cue 1 Cue 1 will fade in slowly over 5 seconds 2 Cue 1 will fade out in 2 seconds 3 Cue 2 will then fade in quickly 1 second 4 Cue 2 will fade out in 3 seconds while cue 3 fades in To apply these rules we need to set the fields on the right hand side of the window 1 Inthe row for cue 1 en
185. i Teang a gyere peri raj baib orgue ai hie r Eae pa piee oah m ba igede they bne 7 When the driver has finished installing a confirmation will be displayed Click on the Finished button to close this window Your driver is now installed Poured Hew Hardware ined Completing the Found Hew Hardan Wir tered The outscored baa briet rails Bee cota lore J Wesel amsa lL coches 8 You will now see that Windows has found more hardware on your system The second part to the installation is to install the USB DMX Kernel The following window will appear to step you through the second installation Foued Haw Hardware Wirand Welcome to the Found New Harda Wir werd Thi vatad hele pow robal rirane Bor LSS irimisce TETE gua Ii poa hudwuna com sih ai halen CO E a ppr dick aaerl donee laha di pi aan Da ed la dat DD balal he pitamo ahasi Piiira i bezisi tro let ca Bree lor aon putiane e Cae 9 Repeat steps 2 through 6 above to complete this operation At the end of the process your DMX hardware should be ready to use The next time you start up LightFactory you will notice that the command window will indicate that DMX hardware has been http www lifacteom age LIGHTFACGTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE found and the DMX universe number will be displayed next to the device description SOUNDLIGHT SUNLITE USB DMX IN DONGLE The installation
186. iffuser Iris Edge Focus Strobe Each of these properties is controlled in the same way Each provides access to the DMX value with a slide control to give a quick visual representation of the setting When modifying the DMX value the position of the slide control will change to reflect the new value Zoom 0 41 q Strobe o2 Focus o Difusor Iris oH 0 Edge o Z EBE Z HE BE Figure 59 Property Slider Controls Use your mouse to click and drag the slide controls to quickly set the DMX value for the desired property GJUICK ACCESS CONTROLS Along the top of the channel view are four quick access controls to the effects library channel groups palettes and selection shortcuts http www lifact com LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 136 Each quick access control will pop up a menu to provides access to the various options Bmx mel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel T Channel amp a gt 0 Value 0 Value 0 Value 0 Value 0 Figure 60 Channel View Quick Access Controls These options allow you to access different functions without having to go into the editor window For example instead of opening the effects editor to test a library effect we can simply run it directly from the FX Library quick access control FX LIBRARY Use the FX library control to run any effect that has been saved to the effects library Th
187. indow at the right hand side of the macro editor 5 The Run Macro button can be used to execute the macro or a shortcut if you assigned one As the macro executes each line will appear in the command interface window Deleting a macro can be achieved by clicking on the appropriate row and clicking the Delete button A confirmation dialog will prompt you to confirm the deletion before the macro is removed ADDITIONAL GOMMANDS Macros consist of the same commands that are available in the command window In addition to these commands you can also enter comments and an execution delay sleep C Style Comments To add a line of text that will not be executed place two back slashes before the text As the system executes each line it will ignore lines that begin with these symbols Sleep The sleep command will cause the software to pause before continuing to execute commands after this line In the above example Figure 150 on page 242 the control channel is set to DMX 220 and then set back to 0 after a short delay of 3 seconds Enter the time of the delay in brackets after the commands The time entered must be in milliseconds http www lifact com 243 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS LEVEL GROUP EDITOR LEVEL GROUP EDITOR 244 Level groups are a way to put a label to a DMX value for use with either the channel view or channel groups Each level group has any numb
188. indows Help software is setup to output Shortcut Page 0 2 Submaster Page 0 BH L ChannelDisnly ria j G to the Enttec DMX over Software is registered to LightFactory Software Group Editor F11 Et h t t d for 10 DMX Uni s LightFactory Professions ition e rn e p ro O CO a n WI Cue List F10 F a Sisir tpt Effects Editor F9 O utp ut to th e fi rst 1 0 AE ras ae cae system Dimmer Patching F8 u n Ive rses fo u n d O n t h e pana DMX Display F7 netwo rk Show Runners F6 Effects Runners F5 Regardless of the dimmers found the software will initially create 500 desk channels that will be patched 1 1 with the available dimmers The number of desk channels can be increased in the system properties If you are using different DMX hardware with the system see System Page 82 for information about setting the output type Sy Palettes F3 LightFactory will always remember the last lighting state that was used and will automatically load the current show If you start the software and find channels already active then this is because it is the state when the software was last shutdown Note Make sure that the grand master GM is _ at full for all examples used in this section http www lifact com 59 LIGHTFACTORY QUICK START A GUIDE FOR USERS USING THE GHANNEL WINDOW USING THE CHANNEL WINDOW The channel window is the main access to all of the channels and fixtures that are connected
189. ing effects The LightFactory Effects Runner screen allows the lighting technician to see at a glance all the effects of interest and conveniently run them at the click of a button EFFECT PLAY Just like playing any other kind of recording or program effect play is simply playing back an effect An effect can be played via the effects editor when first setting up an effect or via either Shows or Effect Runners When run via shows using cues the effect runs automatically However when using the Effects Editor or the Effects Runners the effects are run manually using the Effect Play button on either interface EFFECT BACK When an effect is running via the Effects Editor or an Effects Runner it can be stopped and reset using the Effect Back button This button will stop the effect and reset it back to the beginning EFFECT PAUSE When an effect is running via the Effects Editor or an Effects Runner it can be paused using the Effect Pause button This button will stop the effect and remember where it was up to By pressing the Effect Play button the effect will continue playing from where it was paused EFFECT SEGMENTS An effect segment is essentially a segment of time when a light is configured to be on as part of an effect Each segment can be 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS configured as to what DMX value the light has during that seg
190. ing is connected correctly and powered up Start Light factory and go to the File gt System Properties gt External Wings 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY OPTIONAL HARDWARE INSTALLATION A GUIDE FOR USERS LightFactory Properties Syehen aabhare Virualiper E Mesa Wago Type IP Adder Playback Submasters 10 7 9161 No inaface selected deleuling to first avadable Sishirg wang ideal ace interlace started Debug mestages ae being recened New wang found 107 60 161 Cina Mertage Count 5 Het Interlece ox ca E Figure 13 System Properties Wing Configuration The above screen will display the connected wings and any relevant information In the event you see a warning on the screen this is due to the fact the IP ranges of your computer and the wing do not match This means for example that the wing would have an IP of 10 7 81 161 and your computer 192 168 0 23 In this case both devices are not on the same subnet and cannot talk to each other properly You can either change the IP of the wing to be in the same subnet as the computer or change the IP of the computer to be in the same subnet as the wing For example if the wing has an IP of 10 7 81 161 you would set the computer to ip 10 7 81 1 with a net mask of 255 255 255 0 You can check your computer s IP address by clicking on Start then Run type cmd enter This will open a command win
191. ing you to locate the file Select the desired file and click Load If the fixture already exists in the library then a warning will prompt you to continue or ignore the fixture To export you fixtures to a text file click on the Export button A file dialog will ask you for the filename The file extension FIT will automatically be appended to the name if you do not enter it Click on Save to complete this operation When exporting fixtures you can select either a single fixture or an entire brand If you select an entire brand all of the fixtures under this branch will be exported into the file 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS Note If the fixture you are trying to use does _ not appear in the available list it may be necessary to download it separately from our _web site In order to keep the fixture library file size as low as possible in the installation we do not include all fixtures by default Please visit our web site to check to see if the fixture you are using is available to download separately http www lifact com fixtures CHANNEL GHARACTER STIC The channel characteristic is a way to adjust the relationship between channel value and the final output of the dimmers The default relationship is 1 1 meaning that if the channel is set to 0 then the output is 0 if the channel is set to 50 then the output
192. ions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY TRANSFER REGISTRATION TO HARDWARE A GUIDE FOR USERS To hire LightFactory and purchase a block of runtime click on the button Hire Software Online The following dialog will appear with further instructions for obtaining a runtime unlock code Hire LightFactory HIRE LIGHTFACTORY SOFTWARE Lightfactory Hire is the perfect way to try out the software before purchase or if you only require a lighting controller for the occasional show How does it work With LightFactory Hire you purchase 12 hour blocks of runtime that will unlock the software and provide you with a fully featured 4 universe lighting controller The 12 hours does NOT need to be in one continious block If you dose the software after using it for 3 hours and start it again the next day you will still have 9 hours of runtime remaining You can purchase 12 24 48 and 120 5 days hour blocks at a time to save time and money Current unlock serial number 688E5F2B50D88EC9 Purchase unlock code now If you are not currently connected to the interner please visit http www lifact com hire html To completer purchase an unlock code You will need the Current unlock serial number to complete this transaction Unlock code Figure 12 LightFactory Hire If you are connected to the Internet on this PC then you can click on the Purchase unlock code now button to be re directed to a online sales form The
193. ip extension if you do not enter it LightFactory Properties Ea Tyrlan Ditata Sellnge Hegel Veasskret Caiena wings Heda Appearance Shovicuts Dtkup Fiber ES hs p Dal are J Irrehuda rradha fae _ include LEDit atri effect filer oO irekia lolin belt arp E gt Firebird Laghitlactony Orie om Gorm Figure 27 System Properties Database tab Options Use the check box s provided to include into the archive some of the other files used in your show http www lifact com 85 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 86 Media Files These are files that are used by the Media Playback effects LED Matrix effect files These are the background images and video files used when running matrix effects Fixture Library The fixture library contains all of the fixture definitions used by the show Backup 1 To backup the database enter a valid path and filename including desired file extension e g c oackups backup zip where you want the backup written to You can also press the Browse button to select the folder you wish to save to and type the filename you want to use eg backup zip into the dialog box 2 Click on the Backup Database button to begin the operation A Working message will appear to the right of the button and all controls will become inactive Once complete the controls will become active again
194. is 50 and if the channel is set to 255 then the output is also 255 Changing the output characteristic allows you to correct for older lamps or make special channels for fixtures that do not have full dimmer functions e g A smoke machine To use the Channel Characteristic 1 Before opening the Channel Characteristic window select the channels you want to edit by clicking on the first channel and dragging the mouse over the desired range 2 Once you have selected the channels click the button labelled Edit Channel Characteristic found at the bottom left of the Dimmer Patch window L channel Characteristic Editor a oe Chnnoate 1 o Chater Sol aha ooo Figure 136 Channel Characteristic Editor http www lifact com 221 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING On the horizontal axis of the graph is the requested value of the channel i e the value a channel can be set to On the vertical axis is the actual output of the dimmers connected to the channel recreated by clicking on the button Reset to default in the bottom left corner of the window 3 To change the curve click inside the graph and using your mouse move the red control points to the desired value When the mouse is over a red point a small box will follow showing the values that the curve is set to LightFactory does not provide you with access to all 255 channel values but o
195. is not checked then it will stop as soon as the effect ends Scale Submaster Assign a submaster to this field to manually adjust the scale parameter of the effect while it is running This can provide a dynamic way to vary the effect Offset Submaster Assign a submaster to this field to manually adjust the offset parameter of the effect Stagger Direction Use this drop down option to specify how stagger will operate on the list of fixtures Forward The stagger will be spread across the fixtures starting at the first fixture Backward This is the opposite of the forward stagger as the fixtures will be staggered from the last one through to the first Bounce Each time the effect runs the direction of the stagger will alternate between forward and backward behaviour 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS RUNNERS A GUIDE FOR USERS Random The fixtures in the effect will have a random order and the stagger applied over the new order MATRIX EFFECT OPTIONS Description Colour Cycle Group Effect Colour Cycle a Exclusive Group 0 Se Independent Submaster 0 Playback US Stark Stop Shortcut 0 gt Overide Fx Length 000 Seconds Loop Continuously L Step to points only C Stop at each point m m Submaster Assigning a submasier to the runner will override the intensity the all of the fixtures contained in the matrix Playb
196. ive 0 00 Start 1 00 Cue Number 1 000 Rec Cue Active Cue List Group 0 Cue List Group 0 RJR Cue 1 00 Cue 10 00 2 00 Cue Number 2 000 3 00 Cue Number 3 000 Description Description 4 00 Cue Number 4 000 5 00 Cue Number 5 000 Fade Out 0 00 Fade Out 0 00 Delay 000 Delay 000 6 6 00 Cue Number 6 000 7 00 Cue Number 7 000 Fadeln 0 00 6 Fadeln 0 00 fy 8 00 Cue Number 8 000 Dwell 0 00 Dwell 0 00 a 9 00 Cue Number 9 000 C Record active effects paccccccesssceccccecescnsoscsevesecccccceeszcenccscecses C Record active effects L Add Edit Multiple Cues Add Edit Multiple Cues _ x Ea Note Drop down combos provide a list of available show groups and cues for you to select _ from To create a new show group and or anew cue simply type the new entry into the input box gt _ provided 140 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS 3 If you want to add a short description to the cue being created enter this into the field provided 4 Select the Record active effects to add any running effects to the cue 5 If you want to add the active channels to more than one cue check the option Add Edit Multiple Cues You will then see a list of all of the cues in the selected cue list Click on all of the cue
197. ive Group 2 Esclusive 2 Pas Pas Submaster 0 Playback 0 Start Stop Shortcut U gt Overide Fx Length O00 Seconds Loop Continuously ate Scale Submaster 0 Offset Submaster 4 i Stagger Direction http www lifact com 237 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS RUNNERS 238 Submaster Assigning a submasier to the runner will override the dimmer of the fixtures contained in the effect As the effect runs the position of the submaster will determine output of the fixtures Playback Assigning a playback will disable the submaster edit as only one can be assigned to the runner at a time A playback relates to the Enttec Playback wing Assigning a playback does more than just utilise the fader on the wing but also allows you to use the play back and pause buttons to run the effect Start Stop Shortcut Set a shortcut number to assign to the playback controls for this runner Pressing the shortcut will start the effect running Pressing the shortcut while the effect is running will pause the effect and pressing it twice within 2 seconds will rewind the effect to the start Override Effect Length Set this field to change the length that the effect will run for If this value is set to 0 the default length Set during creation of the effect will be used Loop Continuously Check this option to make the effect loop back to the start when it finishes If this option
198. ix is defined as a red box and the path is the black line tracking around the image To add a point click on the desired location and the path will now trace to the newly created point To move an existing point click on the point holding the mouse button down and drag the mouse to the desired location http www lifact com 205 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR To remove the last point in the path click on the button in the top left corner of the window At any point you can right click to edit the details of the point Delete Point Edit Rotation Edit Size Show point information Figure 125 Matrix effect right click menu To remove any other point in the path right click on the desired point and select Delete from the resulting popup menu To change the rotation of the matrix at a point select Edit Rotation from the right click menu and enter the desired value in degrees into the edit box that appears To change the scale of the matrix at a specific point select Edit Size from the right click menu and enter the desired value into the edit box that appears When the effect plays the scale of the matrix will transition between values across the length of the path Use the Show point information option toggle to turn on or off popup balloons that will show you what the rotation and scale setting are for each point The balloons will appear as you hove
199. l from the right hand channel list and click on the _ button http www lifact com 165 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 166 To maximise the included channel side of the window you can hide the available channels by clicking on the hide button between the two sections Charra i F49 me 4 51 Hie Minimise available dl ha oS channels 3 Figure 82 Cue channels splitter bar To edit any of the values excluding fields flagged n a in the right hand grid click into the field and enter the desired value All values are DMX values and must be in the range 0 255 Some fields can also accept decimal values for fixtures that support 16 bit resolution The fields pan tilt control colour and gobo also provide assistance through drop down menus To access any of these click on the button to the right of the field In the example below the gobo field allows you to select from images of the fixtures gobo s Channels Max Value Wait Time Fade Time Pan Tilt Con _ 49 255 0 0 0 7 50 255 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 4444 4 4 ooococ0cccon trol olour Gobo1 0 X X Focus 0 0 a Figure 83 Drop down menu for gobo control Clicking on the channel number in a row will bring up the Fixture Property Editor if the channel is an intelligent fixture This will operate exactly as it does in th
200. le we have a Martin MAC 250 with its starting address set to 26 1 Open the patching window by clicking on the Dimmer Patching button on the right of the command interface http www lifact com 61 LIGHTFACTORY QUICK START A GUIDE FOR USERS PATGHING A MOVING LIGHT 62 Figure 17 Dimmer Patching Window Below the label Available Fixtures near the bottom of the window you will see a list of brands of fixtures and a special option called Standard Dimmer Expand the Martin brand by clicking on the small plus to the left of the name You should then see the complete list of the Martin fixtures contained in the fixture library Click on the fixture labelled MAC 250 Mode 4 and notice that the picture on the right hand side has changed to show your selection Move the mouse over the Dimmers section of the window and notice that as you move the mouse the 13 dimmers trailing your mouse are highlighted This shows that the fixture we have selected uses 13 dimmers to control it and that we should consider these reserved for this light Move the mouse over dimmer 26 our starting address and click and hold down the left mouse button Drag the mouse over to the left hand side of the window and over channel 6 When you release the mouse button you will see that the details column of channel 6 now displayed MAC 250 Mode 4 26 This shows us that a MAC 250 is patched with the
201. ll then be expanded showing all of the models available 2 Click on the fixture model you want to patch and you will see a picture of the light on the right 3 When you move the mouse over the Dimmers section of the window click the mouse on the dimmer where the fixture starts and while holding the mouse button down drag the dimmer over the channel you want to patch Note When intelligent fixtures are selected the dimmers will be highlighted in grey to show the number of dimmers that the fixture uses The channel detail will now show the newly patched fixture followed by the symbol and the start dimmer number You can patch multiple intelligent fixtures at one time consecutively by changing the quantity Qty value at the top right of the Available Fixtures section If more than one fixture is patched then additional fixtures will occupy the channels following the first one you drag the patch to Available Fixtures Qty 1 Figure 130 Quantity control for intelligent fixtures Once you have patched an intelligent fixture you can add more to the patch by holding down the shift key on the desired fixture and pressing the down arrow FLIP PAN amp TILT In the channel section of the window are two columns titled Flip Pan and Flip Tilt These options give you the ability to reverse the operation of the pan and tilt control of moving lights If you find that a moving light has been hung in
202. mbi plays inma when addi cae eu ieie Poni G La Cum Liat DaNo Hini Cus Diouti Dhani Filet Fey Dhari Diiu Tega iy Fadel Drai Faia ha FA Coplay Tienes Fee Sheila I 5S ian p FTA k Ed jirg Ed Hons tus 0th Of fo i Fame Aan H j i frei Om LE Preset Gasper ag Ee Hore Ei Hone Cu o Of DOR fmk gh wm Loo ras iti Mach El fore on Lie ii igis DOD Pele alan COC Le i i 0 fit Ge ij En Hins Cus om Git w pg Ce E rate i 0 aa Paci Ei Hirs a Chae E iii iit iih 2 Ge ajn patida a Ti Ao wi aren liane ml Cus ih 1 ie ei 2 Pa a m ot E a iih Iik om Zia ae E E E I ti Frak E m Cue tue 4 ie om de 10ih EOE OEF Ki Er i ae i EF iii iM im 7 Ot afaa idn ndn oH Jobesds on Ej fuse E iih 1 I J W ua cat ee oa E e 2 i 20 Cy ait t Hore Cus w Dih 3i pih iit ae i ia ik Op jaam i moo 86 po azi Ei Hon Cz bed I 1 T LINI m i E ii E nn init E AE spur THIEF IV E F S of m hire Foe Sh ze Goe Oe oe omp es Cm Lt saiia Camere Co Meet Coe 7 s ak De Cue Stop Com Bae Cum Benet Femrareg Cup Lt omge Gum Figure 79 Show Editor Shows consist traditionally of a list of cues each of which contains a defined lighting state and or effect sequence When a cue is triggered the lighting state becomes active and channels attached to the cue will be set to their preset levels CUE LISTS LightFactory provides the ability to create multiple cue lists to help manage and run complex
203. ment or in the case of intelligent fixtures you can specify other properties that apply during the effect such as pan tilt gobo etc Using the Effects Editor it is simple to add remove segments shorten lengthen segments and configure the properties for the fixtures involved INTELLIGENT PREPARING OF FIXTURE PROPERTIES Intelligent fixtures will automatically work out when they are free to prepare for the next time the dimmer is on During a dark period of the effect the fixture will automatically set up properties such as pan tilt and colour for the next segment This means that the fixture is already set up prior to its next segment thus reducing any delay in response when a segment becomes active EXCLUSIVE GROUPS To ensure that only one effect operates within a specified group exclusive groups can be created We may have a number of effects for the same group of lights where it makes no sense to run any more than one effect at a time If we did the effects would conflict and cause undesirable results By placing an effect into an exclusive group it will stop all other grouped effects when you attempt to start it COMMAND INTERFACE LightFactory comes equipped with a command interface This is similar to a simple text editor It allows a technician to type commands directly to the system bypassing the graphical interface lt can be advantageous to do this if a quick change is required and the technician is familiar
204. n 1 O00 I dahma heak tie earn thor eal b Gua DOO Sit 2 f PEED OL pe 140 Ahha begana Ie a 120 Chaa iip herra Se 109 Abba Moose ES im Da 11500 Cos fate 11 0 Sais ean yee Ci DOO Hiwi iam com 1 0a r VM Beatles Mesam Ke a eee F T a Ph at TE Rooke n 0 Cam Bhd 6 1990 Mit Cue 700 Cini freee 2 00 sapere a an Peai z ihi Lus OOD Sis Oe Pa ier oad hey c LOR Sim Com 0G PISTONS FIRST 7 K Freedom io E az ar Wip You ham a DO Sian Ci O00 Sat B ita gt ath Rekghi My Fun 1i ee ne rapp Thai Cus 000 ia 9 Ot Om a In Highama Tma pr e EET Oh 1 11 Sprang Fuca a A s ECITLLEL 11 i Gi 12 Yeah taring EC i pertanh aw Thai Coser C00 Sit Tz m o 1 10 Filth Georgian Se Du DOD Sis Baa tereg rem 1 49 Fike Goras 13 a 1 145 Jee pen 14 TTA Soe Of A Click jo arbga bat 15 Ui Bimi Coe 0 WaT FC POSTMS ElapSnag Cue re int Page i Gest Snteads k Sutemaaters Il Fi r Si mE poe e j Tei cis ae Tc we i Raio 55 am Gee Freber 57 K Fers Sonn mi Fami Te gt pag ig Usci Pess Er Go Ry ee Ewi j Pei eT i bamm Sie Bac f Perit O71 Teme ol j Gta Ces feed Fiia pI wa laa ae dy Slog Dao I Pers PS Ssi Fen 1 a Erria ney miy gt fine Fee
205. n as you press enter the numbers will disappear and the selected channels will now have a value of 30 The lights connected to those channels should now be displaying 30 of their maximum output 6 Un select channel 1 by clicking on its cell with the left mouse button You will see that the cell is now highlighted green This indicates that the channel is not selected but is active Note An active channel is any channel with an output value above 0 7 With channel 3 still selected move the scroll wheel on your mouse up one click you should see the value increase by 5 to 35 The mouse scroll wheel is a convenient way to control the intensity of selected channels when the exact value you want is unknown Note If you do not have a scroll wheel on your mouse use the and keys as replacements Channels can also be selected in large numbers by holding the mouse down and dragging it over the channels you want 1 Click on channel 5 and hold down the mouse button 2 Now drag the mouse over to channel 7 and release the button You should now see channels 3 5 6 and 7 all selected 3 Move the scroll wheel up and down and notice that all of the selected channels increase or decrease by 5 with every movement PATCHING A MOVING LIGHT To use the channel window for controlling a moving or intelligent light we first need to tell the software where and how the fixture is patched into the DMX chain In this examp
206. n be modified by setting the bottom control labelled Rot If the fixture supports 16bit gobo values or gobo rotation values then the maximum value will be 65535 EFFECTS For fixtures that support special effects such as prisms and beam splitter the three effects controls can be used to set the feature For more information about what effects your fixtures support refer the documentation accompanying the fixture or visit the manufacturer s web site http www lifact com 131 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY Effect 1 T Effect 2 0 A Effect 3 0 Figure 56 Effects Control The effect control does not have a helper function because the action is ambiguous and dependent on the fixture chosen CONTROL GHANNEL The control channel is used to send special instructions to the fixture such as turning on the lamp In many fixtures this control channel is also used for operations such as strobe Control Channel Off Figure 57 Control Channel Control To choose a control function click on the button a menu will pop up Figure 58 listing all of the supported functions of the fixture Alternatively set the value of the control channel directly by editing the DMX value in the edit box provided Note When a control function is selected the Control Channel Control button will display the name of the selected channel rather than the default text Control Channel O
207. n the right click menu and at the bottom of the window The special shortcuts also allow you to set shortcuts to open various windows The attribute shortcuts also serve a dual purpose depending on the window that currently has focus If you are in the channel display and have an intelligent fixture selected then the attribute shortcuts will shift focus to the control appropriate for the attribute Pressing the shortcut while in the command interface will bring up the appropriate word to use in the command line To use the special shortcuts or to globally disable them use the check box labelled Use special shortcuts LightFactory Properties System Database Settings Registration Visualiser External Wings Media Appearance Shortcuts Special System Shortcuts Use special shortcuts Control Shortcut a Window Command Interface Window Channel Display Window Channel Groups Window Cue List Window Effects Editot Window Dimmer Patching Window DMX Display Window Show Runners Window FX Runners Window Macro Editor Window Palettes Window Level Group Editor Window Channel Selection Shortcuts Ib 4b 4b db am ar ah a a a a a ILa oo o oo Oo eo Go Go Go GO Go CLG a Window Matris Effect Preview Window Shortcuts Figure 35 System Properties Special Shortcuts v 98 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A G
208. nd in the System Properties The Force Prop feature allows you to override the tracking behaviour for individual fixtures in a cue With this option checked all of the properties attributes including ones set to zero will be applied when the cue runs regardless of the values in the previous cue See the section Tracking Intelligent Cue Execution on Page 23 for more information about tracking behaviour Note The Show Channel Select window will _ only show the properties that the selected fixtures contain If a fixture does not support a feature but the field is shown because other _ fixtures do then the field will show n a for not applicable On the left of the Show Channel Select window are all the channels available in the system Channels can be selected individually or a range can be selected by clicking and dragging the mouse over the channels to include Selected channels can be added by clicking on the _ _ button Channels can also be added to the cue using the command edit box at the bottom right of the window Add Channels Figure 81 Cue add channels command interface Use this box to enter the same syntax as you are familiar with in the command line window Press enter or click on Add Channels to process the command e g 1 5 30 will add channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to the cue with their value set to 30 To remove channels from the cue select the channe
209. ndicate that it has found some new hardware and the installation process should start automatically If this does not occur then use the Windows Add new hardware or Computer Manager Win 2K XP option in the control panel to manually install the drivers 5 On windows 2000 and XP systems the driver for this device should be installed automatically and with only subtle warning balloons popping up in the task bar Finally a message saying your new hardware it setup and ready to use will be displayed Once you have seen this message then you are ready to start using the interface and you will not need to do anything further SOUNDLIGHT SUNLITE USB DMX DONGLE To install the USB hardware on your computer make sure the computer is running and you are logged in with administrative privileges 46 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE A GUIDE FOR USERS 1 Connect the USB DMxX Interface to a free USB Port and check that the power LED indicator is lit If this is not the case check the USB cable and hub your hardware is plugged into Your computer should immediately indicate that it has found some new hardware and the installation wizard should start automatically If this does not occur then use the Windows Add new hardware or Computer Manager Win 2K XP option in the control panel to manually install the drivers Select the Install from a list
210. ner aj PAN TILT SWING ay PAN TIL SPIN 1 yl PAN TIL 10 SMALL FF Colour MAN ay Left cick to assign Citect Name move Elect Name Spin SMALL Chas Nane Flainbow an effect Leng 00 05 D0 Pitak 12 Langh 0 05 00 Playback 16 20 Stepr 8 Bounce Playback 2 0 00 00 E gt oo 00 47 H E ii oo 00 00 gt ovo oo gt i o oo 00 aa New Effect Runner Ef PAN TIL BIG SWING a PAN TIL SPIN 2 EF COLOUR FILIP MANUJ Lett chek to atig Bg pen anin e Elect Hamna of ar Chae 0 Nana tap bottom cx ho an efinet Lergh 00 oD Pints mh 13 Leng 00051 00 Pima 17 Stepe Rource Pigtieck 3 00 00 00 Z o0 0 00 S gt ii 00 00 88 Ha ron Step M gt LE New Effect Runner jag PAN TIL 1 i CONAS pa J Pink Thu Blue tnt tnd Lett check to assign Filt Name swap Plec N gy Chase Name Pink theough biar an etinct Leng r 00D Playheck 14 Lenght 1008 00 Pimbeck 18 Sipe 16 Forward Playhack 4 00 00 00 Ki 00 00 00 H P 11 00 00 00 i gt i 00 00 00 M gt COLOUR RD GN iy Chase Name Red geen in ad Steps 2 Forward Playback 5 oo o0 00 gt tt lt gt Add Effect Flunner Expanded View Edt mode Tanson 0 00 gt A Rest Ad If Pour Ad Figure 147 Effects Runners Window This window will remain empty until you begin adding runners by clicking on the Add Effect Runner Runners can be removed by clicking on the small trashcan in the top right of the frame Use the check box labelled Edit Mode to toggle between bei
211. ng able to make changes to the effects runners This option is useful when using the runner in a live environment to prevent accidentally deleting or popping up the edit window When the effect runners are not in edit mode the small trashcan in the top right of the frame will disappear Transition The transition time spin edit allow you to set a smooth transition between two effects that are running at different speeds This option will only work on effects that are in the same exclusive group When the transition is set to anything above zero the effects will soeed up or slow down over the time set http www lifact com 233 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS RUNNERS At any time you can re order the effects runners by right clicking to bring up the move menu Click on the Move Up or Move Down to rearrange the effect runner appearance order Color Can Chase Ra Chase Ne Move Up Move Down Figure 148 Effect runner move options To set up a newly created Effect Runner Left click inside the runner to bring up the Effect Runner Properties window Dieu hins 5 x x _ r Dim hiai 7 ing foe a ee Qeeeeie Fulenge 200 Senos Sie peeks re m Os I igi Setoreli Wagga Clechon Forrai Face Tee 20 i a itfa L a als a ee Dna Litr ee Figure 149 Effect Runner Properties Windows The description field can be used to e
212. ng show cues and provides some convenience options to make using the software easier EE LightFactory Properties E Tyin Dalatira Gething Heydar Wait Caiana wings Meda Appt hobo Cua List Dalaullis Wak Trie 00N Fade in Tine 00N C Auhomastionly apply Shutter Operi vith dimer C Cue Fade our spokes to outgsing cue Rebate tal channels on cue oo Deel Time ULU Ser Sirei petal bes Fade DukT ime O Sec Unpech channel when clearing the curert show FH Dely Te 0 00 fe See Let Channel Group Shortcuts to immediately appie settings 1 Disab cwble click in channad view Prefateh Tma 0 00 See Ll Arrume 0 values ifittune absent when racking Dio peso pakad channet oh AP EE gp O pisi s Apply peodtinn changea be relative effer in rezil tires L Force Properties _ Aube siig pubmacters sath plavbacks Channel Group Del aulls Fade Tine 000 t Sec ray ONT Level ar E Da Owarde et GH Subenaste 14 l O invest GH S ubraster Lighitactony Onder ge J aa Figure 28 System Properties Settings tab Cue Defaults The cue defaults will apply every time a new cue is created By default these settings are all set to zero seconds Set a cue default by either typing the desired time or using up and down arrow controls to the right of the edit box Channel Group Defaults The channel group defaults will apply every time a new channel group is created Set the default fade time and behaviour using the controls provided
213. nly 50 control points The values in between are calculated as a best fit between the points using a spline curve Note The speed with which you move your mouse when modifying the curve will determine how even your curve becomes If you move fast _the curve will be very jagged moving slowly will result in a smooth curve 4 Once you have created the desired curve click on the Save button to record the changes and return to the Dimmer Patch window Click on the Cancel button to forget the changes and return without any modification DEFAULT CHARACTERISTICS In the bottom left corner of the characteristic edit is a drop down menu to automatically create common characteristic curves Linear Exponential Offset 1 Offset 2 b Curve Figure 137 Available default characteristic curves 222 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS Click on the button Reset to defaulf to bring up the options available Select the desired curve by clicking with the left mouse button A warning dialog will prompt you to confirm that you want to replace the current characteristic curve SAVED GHARACTERISTICS Use the Saved Characteristics option to store dimmer curves for use later To save the current curve select Save from the drop down menu A dialog will appear asking for the name you want to give to the characteristic
214. o buttons to help get the number correct You can click on the Past to insert the number from the windows clipboard or mport to load a registration file from the other system See mporting and Exporting Registration Details Page 41 Once you are sure you have entered the correct serial number from the other system click on the Proceed button to generate a new registration code After the system has generated a new registration code it will create a new serial number for this system and the old registration code will no longer be valid 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY TRANSFER REGISTRATION TO HARDWARE A GUIDE FOR USERS Enter the new registration code into the LightFactory system matching the serial number you just entered To aid with this process you can click on the button Save registration to file and import the resulting file into the new system IMPORTING AND EXPORTING REGISTRATION DETAILS LightFactory provides the ability to store the registration information in a simple text file to keep as a backup or move between systems To save the registration details click on the button Save registration to file and a save dialog will appear prompting for a file name Select an appropriate directory and filename and click Save to complete this operation To load an existing registration file into LightFactory click on the button Load registration from file A load
215. o learn how to use a submaster once it has been set up see Submaster Options on page 109 SHORTCUT 154 The channel group shortcut can behave in one of two ways depending on the setting in the System Properties called Channel Group Shortcuts to immediately apply setting If this option is turned on default the pressing the shortcut will apply the groups setting to the channels and fixtures using the fade time set in the 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS group When using the channel groups in this mode the ability to set individual attributes and properties to an Off state is very important For example if you setup a channel group with pan and tilt information set for each fixture and have all other attributes dimmer colour etc set to off then channel groups become a position preset that can be called up at any time This is a useful feature for both on the fly control or when pre programming shows away from the final venue If this option is turned OFF Channel Group Shortcuts to immediately apply setting then pressing the shortcut will select the group and bring the Channel Group window to the front of the screen Once the shortcut has selected the group you can then use the scroll wheel to bring the group up or down To assign a shortcut to a channel group enter a valid shortcut number into this field Once ent
216. o DMX value 230 using the fade times of the fixture or cue 230 f2 4 Property will be set to DMX value 230 using the fade time of 2 4 seconds 255 f6 Property will be set to DMX value 255 full using the fade time of 6 seconds http www lifact com 167 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR EDIT LIVE In the bottom left corner of the Show Channel Select window is a check box labelled Edit Live When this is checked changes made to the channels will become visible in your lighting rig When this is first checked you will notice nothing happen but as soon as you click on a channel or range of channels the current values will become active in the DMX system This feature allows to you confirm that the changes you make are what you expect in reality When this field is checked and you are using the Fixture Property Editor to edit intelligent fixtures the fixtures will automatically be set to the current state pan tilt colour etc and any changes can be seen immediately on stage SHOW DIMMER VALUES AS PERCENTAGES Check this option to convert the dimmer levels to a percentage value rather then the real DMX values 0 255 ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO OTHER CUES By right clicking on the Cue List Channel Select window you will access the option to add channels in this cue to other cues Select the desired channels by clicking on the channel number field and dragging the
217. o the last name used to login to the software and will automatically place the cursor into the password field Enter the password for the user and press the enter key or click login to proceed to the main interface 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS SUBMASTER OPTIONS Submasters can be assigned to perform a number of functions Traditionally a submaster is a physical slide control that allows the user to input a value between 0 and 255 The following functions can be assigned to LightFactory submasters Channel groups Scenes amp Submasters Cue go execution Cue intensity override Effect runners intensity override Chase step rate control e Chase fade time control LightFactory provides up to 1000 submasters that are accessed through 10 pages Obviously computers do not typically come with a number of physical faders so LightFactory provides access to submasters through either an on screen interface or through add on hardware Open submaster page SubmasterPage 0 we i a Submaster page control ON SCREEN SUBMASTERS The on screen submasters provide access to 200 submasters across 10 pages Each of the 20 submasters per page is represented by a slide control and spin edit box i Note LightFactory can support up to 1000 submasters by connecting external hardware to the system Setting a submaster can be done
218. obo 1 Gobo 2 Off Gobo 3 Off Zoom Off t J 5 Diffusion Off F J J Ee Add Palette Delete Palette Sorted by Description iv Off L Figure 152 Fixture Property Shortcuts Create a new palette by clicking on the Add Palette button in the bottom left corner of the window The Delete Palette button will remove the currently selected row A dialog will prompt you to confirm the delete operation 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY PALETTES A GUIDE FOR USERS Note The easiest way to set up new palette is _to use the right click menu option in the channel window See Add selected channels to palette on page 143 to learn how to do this The currently selected palette is represented by a small triangle along the left of each row The properties listed in the right hand half of the window are the properties for the selected palette The description field can be used to identify the fixtures and properties that will be set The description will be displayed in the on screen shortcuts window See Shortcut Options on page 111 to learn about the shortcuts window The channel field is the list of channels that the properties will be applied to Enter the list of channels by separating each by a comma or space Note Leaving the channel list blank will apply the properties to the selected fixtures in the channel view http www
219. of the window A dialog will ask you to enter a name for the new matrix Click on the OK button and the new definition will appear in the list on the left hand side of the window To delete a matrix click on the Remove Matrix button in the bottom left corner of the window A dialog will ask you to confirm the operation Click on the OK button to delete it from the system The size of the matrix can be changed at any time by setting the columns and rows spin edit boxes along the bottom of the window By default a matrix will be empty with no fixtures assigned In order to output a matrix effect to fixtures you must identify where the fixtures are in the grid To do this click on the desired cell and a fixture number will appear The Next Fixture edit at the bottom of the window will automatically increment so that the next fixture can be assigned At any time you can change the Next Fixture number to any desired system channel By clicking in the grid holding the mouse button down and dragging the mouse over several cells you can assign a number of fixtures at the same time Each cell will be assigned a unique fixture and the Next Fixture value will be incremented ASSIGNING AN IMAGE Use the Load amp Clear options to assign a picture of the matrix for future reference The image assigned to the matrix is used when displaying the array of lights in the channel layout view Click on the Load bu
220. of these colours 1 Click on the drop down arrow and pick the desired colour Colour Wheel 1 MM cee 190 44 Pa E 40080004 PY D Fuchsia Figure 52 Using the Colour Wheel Helper Control 2 On selection of a colour from the helper control the real value will be displayed in the control to the right In Figure 52 above blue has been selected and the corresponding DMX value 180 is displayed in the control to the right CMY COLOUR MIXING For fixtures that support CMY colour mixing the property editor provides access to these settings This section also provides http www lifact com 129 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY access to CTC Colour Temperature Control for fixtures that have this feature ETE Figure 53 CMY Colour Mixing and CTC Controls To set the output colour of a fixture edit the cyan magenta and yellow until the desired colour is found Alternatively the colour can be selected from a colour pallet by clicking on the Chooser button Select Fixture Colour Select Fixture Colour YGA Internet HSB RGB CMY VGA Internet HSB RGB CMY Hue o 294 A Sewan p 63 J Biche TT m J rs Figure 54 Colour Chooser To use the colour chooser you can either Select one of the pre defined basic colours by using the VGA or Internet tabs or Create your own custom colour by using the HSB RGB or CMY tabs These
221. on the double click operation will cause the selected cue to execute immediately PRINT GUE LIST Click on the Print Cue List button to get a physical copy of all of the cues in the cue list Clicking on this button will open a preview window that will show the layout of how the information will be printed 176 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR An effect sequence is an automated sequence of lighting states that typically runs without user interaction There are four types of effects supported in this version of LightFactory Simple Chase Simple chases contains a number of lighting states and are similar to a basic cues list Time vs Fixture This effect contains a list of fixtures each assigned a number of timed segments All effects have a default length of time in seconds that they will run for Attribute Property This effect allows you to assign a path to specific attributes of the fixture As the effect runs over a set time the attribute or property follows the defined path Matrix Specifically designed for use with LED or grid lighting this effect provides an easy way to deal with a large number of lights Media To playback media files flash animations or control a DV desk To access the effects editor click the Effects Editor button on the command interface window or select the option from the comman
222. ontrols in the bottom right of the window The active cue list is the cue list currently loaded into this runner and is highlighted in green The currently active cue within the list is also highlighted in the same colour 1 use the show runner screen however while editing and testing your show it would be inconvenient to keep switching between windows To assist with this LightFactory _ provides a single show runner on the cue list editor window For more information on show runners refer to Show Runners on page 227 Note To run shows it is recommended that you CUE S The cue list is a series of cues each numbered between 0 000 and 99999999 999 The cue number determines the default order that cue will be run however the strict order is determined by the next cue field To create a new cue 1 Click the Add Cue button below the cue list editor http www lifact com 159 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 2 The newly created cue will be added to the end of the list with a cue number one integer value above the last cue e g if the last cue number was 2 35 then the newly created cue will be 3 00 3 LightFactory will assign the next cue field to the first cue thus creating a show that will automatically wrap around As the new cue is the last one in the sequence LightFactory will also change the previous cue and set its next cue value to the
223. onventional NXIUrES resna a AA 14 teligent FIXIES sssri a a aa 14 SCENE aa a a a a eahieatncntteteeere cami 17 LightFactory Concepts sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 17 MAINE Groups sirsie aa a aa 17 CUS ISB anenun e a aa acaesieoeae 21 ENE I eana a a ra a a A 23 Command INTErfACE saisin ta nan a a a a N 25 PAEO S nei a a a a a 26 MacOS eiaa a a a a 26 SOM UC US aa a a a a tl enaaes 26 Computer Conce pls sisii adenine 27 Mouse Scroll WNES iseci A 27 Drag and DrOD aeria 27 Right click pop up Menus ccccssscceceeseeeceesseeeceaseeceesseeeseasereees 27 Screen Real E Stale orra ies eeaategnciede ata ceheeeneled 27 WIR GOW DOCKING ordeno dai a baniialuls 28 MID e es cagicesiss scusatsdsanare ase sutaceesnaitaad souesauidanodece sd nceiendseuecanesanat 28 SMPTE asscng teas adet wanietucatansdcann tn assetsaasdtngete as anancesscunnteassceseesesoseneanaaces 28 SE SEVO epee ee nn Ree E rer eT 28 IMC COCGS sanasa uere E E E AAEE sous 28 USD A 29 E MOMO uea r E E noes 29 Installing LightFactory cccsscseseeeeeeesseeseseeeeeeseeeeeseeeees 30 Installation Pre requisites ccccssessesseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeaeeseenseeseenseeees 30 Installation Procedure ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 30 Downloading LightFactory cccccecceccsseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeenaees 30 Installing LightFactory 2653 asaoscor tesGaa eveititonmpendunouseatacar
224. or its various features When you patch an intelligent fixture all the dimmers for that fixture are automatically patched into that channel WN lt a Wx oS OONOOaARWND gt OONOAaRWND gt O O See Intelligent Fixtures on page 14 for further information about Figure 1 Patching Multiple Dimmers per Channel intelligent fixtures CHANNEL CHARACTERISTIC Typically a channel dimmer level ratio is 1 1 That is when the channel is at a certain value the dimmers in that channel are also at that value Figure 2 On occasion it may be necessary to configure a channel to output levels other than 1 1 The actual level sent to the dimmer can be scaled up or down or configured into a non linear relationship For example a lamp may not perform well below a certain level The Channel Characteristic curve can configure the channel to prevent the dimmer from ever reaching such levels Figure 3 The Channel Characteristic can be used for configuring individual channels or for multiple channels at once To learn how to use the Channel Characteristic see Channel Characteristic on page 221 http www lifact com 13 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTING CONCEPTS Feal vakis Figure 2 Default Channel Characteristic C nd Rea Vatue 0 Channel Value 15 Figure 3 Example Channel Characteristic 1 CONVENTIONAL FIXTURES Conventional fixtures are those that have only one p
225. or specific location Advanced option and click Next to continue Result The following window will prompt you for the location of the driver installation files Fousd Hew Hardware Wierd Fena chaia pow peach sad piialshon spini ipach thon ihs beset diran ari thene kaati ew ha chek bass bakas io im g equa ches disi wsch ahah inches kanal pha and emaye e one Tha beri Greer bard aal be rahaki L Seadh semcerabbe mada opp OD le teephade r biror he pear D 4 Ch Dia sech alll chicos thes chever bo matal Chedes thn aghast apne the Gece deve from a ial irin dota not aarin Bhat fhe deren eau chazan alll bee the beat mth br pour hadai If your LightFactory software was supplied on CD then the hardware drivers can be found on the same media Select the Include this location in the search path and browse to the drivers directory on the CD Alternatively your DMX hardware should have been supplied with a driver disk titled Soundlight USBDMX 1 2 IN Driver and Installation Disk To use this disk place it into the drive http www lifact com 47 LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE 48 6 and enter the corresponding drive letter into the space provided e g A Click on the Next button to continue with the installation You will be notified if the correct drivers are not found in the specified directory If this occurs return to
226. or the channel group window Group Editor http wwwilifactcom o 25 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS PALETTES PALETTES 246 Palettes are a way to quickly and easily set a list of fixtures to a specific state Only properties attributes where the value is not set to Off will apply allowing the shortcut to control a very specific attribute of the fixtures In the example Figure 152 below the 6 shortcuts are used to set the first gobo wheel of MAC 250s moving lights and will override the existing state of the fixture regardless of what is controlling the light You may for example have an effect that is controlling the pan and tilt the shortcuts can then be used to manually set the gobo A palette can operate on a set list of fixtures or it can apply the setting to the list of currently selected fixtures If the channel field is left blank then the palette will apply to the selected fixtures Open the Palettes editor window by clicking on the button at the right of the command interface or by selecting it from the windows menu at the top in Lf Palettes RAX Description Shortcut Channels aj MAC 250 Gobo 1 MAC 250 Gobo 1 0 Property SetValue a MAC 250 Gobo 2 0 Dimmer Off E MAC 250Gobo3 0 lt Pan of B MAC 250Gobo4 0 F Tilt o E MAC 250 Gobo 5 0 Control Off F J MAC 250 Gobo 6 0 Colour 1 Off k Colour 2 Off F J Colour 3 Off G
227. ot of a lighting state where the output of each channel in the group is a proportion of the group value To create a new blank group click on New Group This will create a group without any channels assigned and all fields set with default values To remove a group from the system click on the row containing the group and click on the button Delete Group A dialog box will prompt you to confirm that you wish to remove the group Click on 150 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS the OK button to remove the group or Cancel to return to the previous window GROUP NAME The group name is a description field that provides easy identification of the group Enter a meaningful description for future reference CHANNELS This is a list of the channels included in the group This list can be edited by entering the channels separated by a coma You can also enter channels using the same syntax as the command window Example 1 3 4 10 20 15 This will add channels 1 3 4 and channels 10 through to 20 excluding 15 to the group The channels included in the group can also be edited by clicking the button to the right of the field This will bring up the Channel Select window This window provides greater control over the maximum value the channel will reach when the group is at 100 and provides access to intelligent fixtu
228. ote The pan and tilt control is an exception to this rule as these are always viewed as 16 bit _values and must be entered as numbers between 0 and 65025 If the end state of a property is zero changes made to the start state will automatically be copied to the end state to assist with creating new segments The properties pan tilt control colour and gobo also provide assistance through drop down menus To access any of these click 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS on the button to the right of the field In the example below the pan and tilt helper is shown aire C fale EiS Ei Eri rih Aude Create Ellects Auto ollpel Deas Figure 110 Pan and Tilt helper popup Below the Start State and End State columns are buttons to bring up the fixture property editor that you are familiar with in the channel window The Edit Start button enables you to edit the start values of the properties the Edit End button is for editing the properties end values See Intelligent Fixture Control on page Note Take care to observe in the top of the Intelligent Fixture Control window whether you are editing start or end values a1 M lhe i e mol A TA a a acres e ee LE gt Figure 111 Editing Advanced Segment Properties using the Intelligent Fixture Controls The Edit Live check bo
229. oundMAax Digital Audio Frequency Range 30 E Hz through to 20000 3 Hz Cue Trigger Level 20 E Min Time 500 EJ ms Figure 37 External Triggers PC Line In Source Select the audio source you want to use to trigger the system Select from Line In CD ROM or PC Microphone using the combo edit provided 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS Frequency Range The frequency range that the software will listen to The default is 20Hz through to 20kHz Cue Trigger Level Select the audio level in dB that will trigger the cue go Min Time Set the minimum time between trigger events MIDIVSMPTE TIMECODE The timecode configuration provides the ability to set up shortcuts Note There is no configuration required for using timecodes to trigger cue go See Timecode on page 174 for more information on using timecodes with the cue system To enable listening to MIDI SMPTE timecodes check the box marked Enable MIDI SMPTE timecode Control To enable timecode support from Winamp check the box marked Enable Winamp Timecode Control I External Triggers MIDI Control PC Line In Timecode MIDI Messages Description Timecode Shortcut New Timecode Event 00 00 00 00 New Timecode Event 00 00 00 00 0 C Enable MIDI SMPTE Timecode Control Add 00 00 00 00 Enable Winamp Timecode Control Figu
230. ovement option on a temporary bases by holding down the control ctrl key and clicking inside the pan and tilt area Position Presets Position presets are a way to remember pan and tilt positions in the system By default the fixture s home position is always available and cannot be removed To add a position preset 1 Setup the fixture to the pan and tilt setting required 2 Click on the position preset button 3 Select Add current position to list from the resulting drop down menu 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS 4 Adialog box will appear asking for a name to be assigned to the new preset Enter short description and click OK To use a Saved preset simply click on the Position Preset button and select it from the drop down list provided The selected position can be removed by selecting Remove current position from list in the drop down menu COLOUR WHEELS LightFactory provides helper controls for up to 3 colour wheels A colour wheel has a fixed list of available colours that can be selected by setting the DMX line to a specific value for each colour Colour Wheel 1 Mi s0000FFR 64 24 Figure 51 Colour Wheel Controls When fixtures are defined in LightFactory s patching screens specific colours can be assigned to DMX values thus making the real colours available in the helper control To select one
231. p www lifact com 217 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING Note Once you have set up or modified a _ fixture you must click on the save button to _ record the changes you have made Unlike other changes made in LightFactory the _ fixture library is saved as a separate file in the program directory All other functions are saved to a database The fixture library is called fixtures fif and will be found in the same directory as the _LightFactory program Whenever a save is made to this file a backup is created and called _ fixtures bak If a problem occurs and you are left with a corrupt fixture library you can simply rename this backup file to restore the last save _ COLOUR WHEELS Alongside each of the three colour wheels labelled Colour 1 Colour 2 and Colour 3 is a button to access the advanced options Click on this button to bring up the window below and assign real colours to the DMX values of this property T Colour Wheel 1 TBR DMX Value Description 0 Open H Correctior gt Yellow gt Dark Blue gt Magenta gt Lime Green gt Lite Blue gt Red gt Pink gt Lavander gt Orange gt Green gt Purple Figure 133 Advanced Colour Wheel Properties Use the Add button to create a new row in the list of colours or click on the Delete to remove the row at the position of the cursor The colour column s
232. p Menu 138 Channel Group Seletor sessu 139 Cue Selection Dialog sscan a 140 Channel Selection Shortcuts ccccccsssesseeeeeeeeeeees 142 Assign Shortcut Number ccccecccccccccesesesseeeeeees 143 Ada Palelei e shout dabtissautustetdasneettensiats 144 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd TABLE OF FIGURES LIGHTING GONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Figure 68 Creating or selecting a chase Step cccsseeeeeeeeeees 145 Figure 69 Creating an effect based on library cceeeeeeeees 146 Ue LOM ae are st ansaca den swcratentnannssounieegsissat aaiedceh caeesWagyseddtaeeaaateuss 148 FE OUMC 1 OSS Os E A E 148 Fiore 72 Auto Pan OU On ar E dader Dewmataces 149 Fisure o GrOup Edito o ccerecco e a recom vieca aeneeeent 150 Figure 74 Channel Select Window ccccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 Figure 75 Group add channels command interface 152 Figure 76 Group channel selection splitter bar ee 153 Figure 77 Channel Groups Menu options ccseceeeeeeeees 156 Figure 78 Cue Selection Dialog ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 157 Pisure 79 SNOW EOQUOP nicest acta a nee 158 Froure 50 show Channel Select yssir erasa an 164 Figure 81 Cue add channels command interface 165 Figure 82 Cue channels splitter bar cc ccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Figure 83 Drop down menu for gobo control ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Figu
233. ply click on the Cue button and a popup menu will list all of the cue lists available 256 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE LIGHTFACTORY USING LF REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS STOP RESET 1 01 Shout tc 1 02 Jailhouse Rock 1 03 Abba Megamix 1 04 Beatles Megamix 1 05 Push It 1 06 Material Girl 1 07 Freedom 1 08 The Way You Make Me Feel 1 09 Relight My Fire 1 10 Nightcrawlers 1 11 Spinning Around _ Figure 161 LightFactory Remote Cue list Selecting the cue lists from this menu will automatically complete the first 2 parts of the syntax by adding the word Cue to the front of the cue list name In the example above if we selected the cue list 1 05 Push It then the remote will automatically put into the command line cue 1 05 Push It and then wait for the cue number to be entered RUNNING MACRO S The same operation can be used for running Macro s Clicking on the Macro button will pop up a list of macro names found on the LightFactory server LightFactory Remo 7 a 1 52 X Connected to 192 168 1 8 ZERO ATTRIB Figure 162 LightFactory Remote Macro Selection http www lifact com 257 LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS USING LF REMOTE BS Press the Execute key to run the command you have entered on your LightFactory system Once the command has been executed it will appear above the entry box and indicate if the
234. quence control Q digit 1 digit 2 For example to trigger shortcut 21 from an external keyboard you would need to program the key sequence control Q 21 If you are using the Enttec shortcut wing no programming is required as the system will immediately associate the keys with the shortcuts in the system For more information on shortcut hardware please visit our web site www lifact com http www lifact com 113 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE WINDOW LAYOUT OPTIONS 114 When LightFactory is shutdown and restarted the position and size of the windows are remembered The next time you use the software you will notice that the windows will re open in the same state as they were last left In the Window menu are two options that allow the positions and settings to be saved and re loaded This allows for multiple layouts to be used for different environments You may for example have one layout for programming a show and one for playback Click on the Save window layout amp settings to save the current position and size of all the windows to a file on your computer A save dialog box will appear asking for a name and location to store your layout Enter a valid name and click Save To restore the position and size of the windows form a saved configuration click on Load window layout amp settings An open file dialog will prompt you to select the file containing th
235. r NRT SR A aR 124 Intelligent Fixture COntrol arei a a a 125 Quick access COn OlS an a na ewoneiias 135 ThenghteickmMmonUrsirea s a NE 137 Channel Group Equtor cussas aaa aaa a aaa aa 150 Group NANG otni a a N O 151 channel Sae A 151 VAIG ame rei ee A E N ee 153 Pade TIME nrr en a a e S 153 BenNavVioUranmaeac ena e e N eae 154 SUDAS lO na a N E N cits 154 NON CU E N O A 154 TOOGIS GNON Utere e N E 155 Snap Properes snieni ee a Aad cand eee aes ee 155 OPON Snaar a e o to dedametaiens cesesupinte eden 156 MEn OD NON serasi a a a 156 CUS EIS UEC lease tacts eee aa ea aia 158 CUE LISO nn tol sacawiasudaasweatamaaniabanigy a 158 Active vs Selected Cue LISts cccccccssseeeceeeeseesseeeeeeeeesseaseeeeees 159 OUG S reigi a 159 Tesing a SNOW sneren eaaa 175 ETICCIS oto Ce ciris a EA a EEEa 177 EITC GlOU DS siosrasrnona a a 177 Creating NEW ENECIS sotene e ET 178 SIMPE CAS Giara 183 TMG Vor IF IXUUNG Eie CIS eap 185 Property Attribute effect ccccccssseeceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeaeeeeesenass 200 Marr LED ENEC eici a 205 Medid ENEC nimeti e e E 208 ERECPUDTA Y irr e e N e E 210 Effect Playback Controls cccccccsssesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 Dimmer Patehihg sissa aaa a 213 EG PUI aeaa TE E 216 Channel CharacteristiC ccccccccscesscccceceesseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeaeees 221 ALCO DUOMS uniin r EEE EES 223 EAI MaUIC I Seeka a a a eased 224 DMX DISplay oninia an aaa E a aa a
236. r the mouse over each point in the path When the effect is played from the editor the red box will track the path over the specified time As the effect runs LightFactory will map the contents of the red box onto the defined matrix The colour of each fixture will be mapped to the colour on the image or video clip The preview button can be used to see the resulting output on screen Matrix Fx Preview _ Figure 126 Matrix effect preview window 206 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Click on the Show only assigned fixtures to apply a mask over the preview that represents the fixtures in the real world EFFECT LENGTH The length defines how long the effect will play for and can be any value up to 1 hour If a video file is selected the software will prompt you to set the length of the effect to the same length as the video If the length of the effect is shorter then the video the video clip will be truncated ZOOM MATRIX To change the size of the area that the matrix will use to generate output set the zoom field When playing back the effect the image will be rescaled to the zoom setting to apply the correct colour STEP TO POINTS ONLY Select this option to jump between points rather than tracking a smooth path When the effect is started the length of the effect will be broken up into the number of control points As the effect runs i
237. rding time thus allowing tracking to work when jumping around the cue list or even between cue lists Tracking means that when the system is transitioning from one cue to the next it applies only those settings that change from the previous cue If a property attribute does not change from one cue to the next then the system will not attempt to apply the setting The channels do not reset themselves between cues if nothing has changed from the previous cue hence avoiding the possibility of undesirable behaviour occurring between cues EFFECTS Effects are time based programs of lighting changes such as chase sequences simple loops colour changes etc The LightFactory Effects Editor allows effects to be easily created tested and adjusted using the intuitive graphical interface Effects can be run from shows via cues see Cues on page 22 or by using Effect Runners see Effect Runners on page 24 http www lifact com 23 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS 24 For more about effects see Effects Editor on page 177 EFFECT GROUPS To facilitate the management of large numbers of effects effects can be grouped into Effect Groups This is essentially a simple way of filing your effects away for easy access You must have at least one group of effects but a single group can contain as many or as few effects as you wish EFFECT RUNNERS The Effect Runners are simple controls for runn
238. re Transfer registration to Hardware Figure 29 System Properties Registration tab To change the registration details click on the Edit Registration Details button to open the following window Serial Number 688E5D2D50D88EC8 User Name LightFactory Software Organisation Registration Name LightFactory Software Registration Code Convert License Code Figure 30 Registration Window hitp wwwilifacicom gg LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 92 Registration of the software is based on the Registration Name Serial Number and the Registration Code The User Name field is optional and not used to authenticate a valid registration Enter your registration details and click on the OK button close the window A dialog will inform you if incorrect details have been entered and allow three attempts to correct the mistake before returning you to the system properties Note If you where previously using an invalid registration you will need to restart the software for it to begin communicating with DMX 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS VISUALISATION GE wsiwyg LightFactory supports integration with the popular WYSIWYG Cast Group hitp www cast soft com and Capture http www capturesweden com visualisation software To
239. re 38 External Triggers MIDI SMPTE Timecode tab To add a new timecode trigger click on the Add button and edit the fields provided To remove any trigger select the event from the list and click on the Remove button Description This provides a way to identify the trigger by entering a description for your reference http www lifact com 101 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE Timecode Set the time code in the format HH MM SS FF that will trigger the shortcut The shortcut will only trigger once when the time is reached Shortcut This field is used to specify which shortcut number you want this trigger to execute 102 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS SCHEDULED TASKS Scheduled tasks allow you to setup recurring lighting events using the real time clock of Windows Each task can be scheduled to run daily weekly monthly one time only every hour or every X seconds Each task executes a LightFactory shortcut Task Scheduler Seles To e x il E New Task Run Now Delete Pause Task Properties Refresh __ Name Schedule Next Run Time Last Run Time Status Shortcut Run every day at 11 07 08 p m 6 07 2004 11 07 08 p m Never Active Schedule 2 Run every 1 of Apr May at 11 08 56 1 04 2005 11 08 56 p m Never Active Every 2 minutes Run every 120 seconds 5 07 2004 11 1
240. re 84 Show Channel Select window with Docked Fixture PEODCLUGS aeria A E 167 Figure 85 Cue channel select add to other cues ceeeeee 168 Figure 86 Show Effect Selection window effects cccee 169 Figure 87 Show Effect Selection window simple chases 170 Fisure 88 Cue Execution SHOMCUtS eenen 171 Figure 9 Cue Channel GrouPSiscreircc a 172 Figure 90 Show Editor controls for testing a show ccee 175 Figure 91 New Effects Builder Opening Page ce eeeeeeeees 178 Figure 92 New Effects Builder Simple chase ccceeeeeees 178 Figure 93 New Effect Builder Timeline ecccccceeeeeeeees 179 Figure 94 New Effect Builder Prop Attrib Effect Page 1 180 Figure 95 New Effect Builder Prop Attrib Effect Page 2 180 Figure 96 New Effect Builder Matrix Effect ce eeeeeeeeeeees 181 Figure 97 New Effect Builder Media Effect cece 182 Figure 98 Right click Menu OPTIONS cc ccceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 182 Figure 99 Effect Editor Simple Chase cccsesssseeeeesseeeeeeeees 183 Figure 100 Group add channels command interface 184 LIGHTFACGTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 1
241. re four types of trigger Cue he user must physically press a Cue Go button either in a show runner or on the show editor window Auto Cues set with the auto trigger will execute immediately after the previous cue has completed its delay fade in and dwell time An auto cue will not wait for the fade out time so that cross fades can be achieved Midi The cue will be triggered by an external midi event occurring See page 99 for information on how to set up MIDI triggers 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS Line In The cue will be triggered by the line in audio source See page 100 for information on how to set up the software for audio triggers Timecode The cue will trigger when the specified timecode is reached If the timecode has already passed when this cue is reached the software will trigger the cue immediately Enter the timecode value into the field provided CUE CHANNELS The channels that are used or recorded into a particular cue A cue can contain any number of channels limited only by the system resources of your PC CUE EFFECTS Known as FX Sequences in the cue list editor these define the special effects if any that are part of a cue TRACKING INTELLIGENT CUE EXECUTION By default LightFactory applies a tracking behaviour when executing cues The tracking is done at playback rather than reco
242. re properties Group Channel Select fal Channels A __ Channels Max Value Pan Til Control Gobo 1 Diffusion Edge gt b41 100 0 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 z 0 0 m 100 100 _ 100 100 100 100 T x 100 JN 0 Channels included in this group a EI 4 oon nonkon lt lt Add Channels Available Channels Figure 74 Channel Select Window On the left of this window are all of the channels available in the system Channels can be selected individually or a range can be selected by clicking and dragging the mouse over the channels you want to include Selected channels can be added to the group by clicking on the _ button http www lifact com 151 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR 152 Channels can also be added to the group using the command edit box at the bottom right of the window g4 Add Channels Figure 75 Group add channels command interface Use this box to enter the same syntax as you are familiar with in the command line window Press enter or click on Add Channels to process the command e g 1 5 30 will add channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to the group with their maximum value set to 30 To remove channels from the group select the channel from the right hand channel list and click the button To edit the maximum value that a channel will reach enter a value as percentage in the
243. reate fade in and fade out Rotate Segments Right _ r Figure 112 Effect Editor Right click Menu Options for Segments DELETE SEGMENT Click on the Delete Segment option to remove the currently highlighted segment from the effect A confirmation dialog will ask you to confirm this operation before the segment is deleted 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS DELETE ALL SEGMENTS Click on the Delete All Segments option to remove the segments for this fixture A confirmation dialog will ask you to confirm this operation before the segment is deleted CUT COPY COPY ALL PASTE SEGMENTS The cut copy and paste functions operate exactly as they do in most applications you use within windows Cutting a segment will remove it from the effect and put on the clipboard for pasting somewhere else while copying places a copy of the highlighted segment on the clipboard without removing it from the effect Copy all segments ignores the currently highlighted segment and places all of the segments associated with the fixture onto the clipboard To place a copied segment or segments onto a fixture select the Paste option while the mouse is over the fixture you would like to paste to Note When pasting if a segment conflicts with segments that already exist for this fixture you are pasting to nothing will happen After a paste oper
244. resentations and undertakings whether express or implied Statutory or otherwise in respect of the Software are hereby excluded to the extent permitted by law In particular but without limitation DSL disclaims to the greatest extent permissible by law any warranty or representation either express or implied of the Software s performance non infringement or fitness for a particular purpose or process Limitation of Liability To the extent permissible by law in no event will DSL be liable to the Licensee for any direct special incidental indirect or consequential loss damage cost or expense suffered or incurred by the Licensee or any third party in connection with the Software The entire liability of DSL in connection with the Software will not exceed the price paid by the Licensee for the Software 6 Term and Termination 6 1 This Licence will remain in effect until terminated 6 2 DSL may terminate this Licence on ninety 90 days written notice to the Licensee or immediately if the Licensee fails to comply with any term of this Licence 6 3 Upon termination by DSL the Licensee will be required to return the Software to DSL and confirm in writing that no copies of the Software have been made and retained 6 4 The provisions of clauses 4 5 7 and 8 of this agreement shall survive termination of this Licence for whatever reason 7 Governing Law 7 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 This Licence shall be governed by
245. rface remotely from any computer on the network enable the telnet interface Once checked you can connect to LightFactory through port number 3100 If you do not see the characters you type in your telnet client enable the Echo Telnet characters option Use the Telnet Port edit box to set the IP port number that the software will bind to Check for software updates 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS By default LightFactory will inform you of new releases of the software to help keep you system up to date For this feature to operate you must be connected to the Internet If you do not wish to receive notification of updates uncheck this option Run LightFactory with TimeCritical operating system priority This option should only be set if instructed to by LightFactory support staff Default paper size when printing Use this option to set the paper size that the software will attempt to print on DATABASE A powerful feature of LightFactory is its built in ability to backup and restore the files that store all of your show information Click on the Database tab to access the backup and restore features When backing up the database the system will automatically zip up the files to reduce the space required and group together all of the files into a single archive When entering a filename the system will automatically append the z
246. rol this As each step executes the time before the next step executes will be determined by the 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS RUNNERS A GUIDE FOR USERS position of the submaster The maximum step time that can be set by the submaster is 10min Chase Direction Use this drop down option to specify how chase will run Forward The chase will run from the first step to the last lf the chase is set to loop the chase will return to the first step after the last step Backward The chase will run from the last step to the first step If the chase is set to loop the chase will return to the last step after reaching the first step Bounce The chase will run from the first step to the last step and then back to the first step If the chase is setup to loop then this will operation will repeat Random Every step in the chase will execute in a random order Step Time To specify a step time other than the default defined in when the chase was created enter a value into this field Setting the step time to zero 0 will cause the default step time to be used Fade Time To specify a fade time other than the default defined in when the chase was created enter a value into this field Setting the fade time to zero 0 will cause the default fade time to be used PROPERTY ATTRIBUTE EFFECT OPTIONS Description Smac flyt Group Effect Smac fly t Exclus
247. roperties between segments For example often we may want the colour of a fixture to be set before the light becomes visible In the LightFactory effects engine this will be done automatically for us if the next segment has this property set To create a new segment simply click inside the space provided to the right of the fixture hold the mouse down and drag the segment to the desired length 188 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS Click here to start holding down the left mouse button Fixtures Channels 42 Drag mouse to end position Figure 106 Example Creating an Effect Sequence _Note By default the newly created segment _will have its start and end states set with the dimmer at full 100 and all other properties set to zero The size of a segment can be adjusted by clicking and holding the mouse button down at either end of the bar and dragging it to the new length When the mouse is moved over the end of the bar its cursor will change to indicate the resize operation Figure 107 i effect 2 e aaa 13 20 Seconds 6 60 13 20 oO ET Ba ey Figure 107 Resizing an Effect Segment To move a segment to a different start position offset hold the mouse button down over the centre of the bar and drag the bar to its new position For more precise control over the position click on the Effect Detail Editor button to t
248. roperty that can be controlled from the lighting desk hence requiring a single dimmer to control it Examples of conventional fixtures are Standard luminaires fresnels P C s plano convex Effects Equipment smoke fog machines bubble machines mirror balls etc INTELLIGENT FIXTURES Intelligent fixtures in contrast to conventional fixtures have multiple properties sometimes called attributes that can be controlled from the lighting desk FIXTURE PROPERTIES ATTRIBUTES Fixture properties can be 8 bit or 16 bit This essentially determines how finely a property can be controlled 14 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTING GONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS A 16 bit property can be more finely controlled than an 8 bit property For example 16 bit pan and tilt enables the fixture to be moved much more slowly than 8 bit pan and tilt 8 bit has 255 settings zero to 255 for the property 16 bit has 65535 255 x 255 settings zero to 65535 for the property LightFactory s Fixture Library stores property information about your fixtures The library is divided into fixture brands This helps to organise the wide range of fixtures that are available into manageable groups See Edit Fixtures on page 216 to learn how to use the fixture library Colour wheel colour A wheel shaped device containing changer colour scroller circles of coloured media gels that attaches to
249. rrent value to a new value Whenever the Value field is changed the fade time will affect how long it takes to reach this new value The fade time can be modified by clicking in the field and changing the value directly or by clicking on the up down buttons to the right of the field http www lifact com 153 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL GROUP EDITOR BEHAVIOUR A channel group can behave in one of five ways when setting the actual output values Override Build Exclusive Highest Takes Precedence Lowest Takes Precedence Independent To change the behaviour of a group select the desired option from the drop down menu accessed by clicking on the small arrow to the right of the field See page 17 for a description of how each behaviour operates and affects the final output of the system SUBMASTER To assign a submaster to a channel group enter a valid submaster number 1 1000 into this field Once entered the submaster will automatically be assigned and become active Submasters are split into 10 pages of 100 possible submasters Use the page number as the first digit followed by the submaster you want to assign To access the submasters the first page page 0 simply enter the number between 1 and 100 For the second page page 1 enter submasters 101 through to 200 Note The value of the group will not change until the next time the submaster changes T
250. s Figure 103 Effects Editor Time vs Bint Effect Effects are viewed in LightFactory as a Fixture vs Time graph Along the top of the effect view you will see a time scale from 0 to the length of the effect On the left of the effect view is a list of the fixtures included in the effect Along the top of the view is the Number of fixtures in effect edit This can be used to add or remove fixtures If this number is increased new fixtures will be added with the fixture number being the next logical channel Also along the top is the Effect Length edit that determines the default duration of the effect Changing the effect length will change the time bar and increase or decrease how long an effect takes to run To change the length of the effect enter the desired time and click on the apply button By default changes to the length of an effect will not change any of the existing segments If you make the effect shorter any segments that go beyond the new length will be truncated Use the Rescale check box to ensure that all segments are rescaled to any length 186 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS changes If this is checked and you make the effect shorter all of the segments will also be resized by the same proportion Note If you wish to use the re scale feature _ you must tick the box before editing the duration of the effect
251. s a Strobe e eo A o ae amp Gobo1 Gobo2 Gobo 3 Effect 1 Effect2 el a 3 RE x ps coche O S heared Zoom Diffuser Iris Edge Focus Strobe sev snk Facut Speed E muer peee Fraim 1 0 0 0 6 Fraim 2 o Fraim 3 o Fraim 4 o E Rotation Rotation gt Rotation Colour Speed Gobo Speed 0 Beam Speed Effect Speed D F Tracking Speed gt lt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt rol Beall kis ee lt gt Fraim A ot lt Figure 49 Intelligent Fixture Control By default this window will be docked with the channel window This option will ensure that the window remains attached to the right hand side of the channel window Moving the channel window will move the properties window and moving the properties window will move the channel window To turn this option off and have the properties window floating free un tick the check box at the top of the window titled Docked Note If more than one fixture is selected the _ properties window will show the state of the first fixture however any changes that are made will apply to all of the current selection http www lifact com 125 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 126 The fixture properties window will only allow access to properties that exist for the fixture If a fixture does not have any gobo control then the gobo selection will be
252. s and devices SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SQL SERVER Structured Query Language server A computer that provides client computers with highly efficient access to database files Firebird SQL Server is a type of database A database is an electronic way of storing information on your computer When you use LightFactory your entire lighting configuration is stored in a SQL Server database This means that you can switch off your computer even unplug everything and LightFactory will still remember your set up LightFactory s SQL Server database has built in backup and restore features to safeguard you against data loss TIMECODE A feature within a video tape that identifies individual frames to define how frames are counted throughout a project It is similar to the page numbers of a book if the pages of the book are out of sequence or have gaps then things get confusing Similarly if a video tape does not have a timecode then finding a particular clip on tape would be time consuming and confusing 28 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY COMPUTER GONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard port that enables you to connect external devices such as digital cameras scanners and mice to Windows 98 and Macintosh computers The USB standard supports data transfer rates of 12Mbps million bits per second a vast improvement over the serial port st
253. s the command line interface in LightFactory See page Command Interface on Page 70 for a full details of the command structure LightFactory Remo 47 f 1 53 X Connected to 192 168 1 8 1 5 9 15 12 dmx 220 Felele HH HEREKE elele DEG i Disconnect ES Figure 159 LightFactory Remote Example Syntax In the above example we have issued a command to set channels 1 though to 5 and 9 through to 15 excluding 12 to DMX value 220 http www lifact com 255 LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS USING LF REMOTE ENTERING ATTR IBUTE PROPERTY COMMANDS The system also provides some helper functions to make entering the syntax easier For example if we want to control an attribute of a fixtures such as PAN then we would need to open the keyboard at the bottom of the screen h and type the word pan The LightFactory remote makes this easier by providing quick access to all of the attributes that can be accessed from the command syntax Clicking on the Att button will popup a menu to select the attribute you want Figure 160 LightFactory Remote Attribute List RUNNING CUES This functional also works when selecting cues and macros To run a cue for example the syntax is cue lt cue list gt lt cue number gt As we do not want to remember all of the cue lists in the system the remote interface retrieves this information for us and lists them in a pop up menu To run a cue from the remote sim
254. s to the channel settings of other groups Channels that have been manually set will not be affected by a Build channel group Example Channels 1 and 2 are set at 50 Channel Group 1 contains Channels 1 2 3 and 4 If Channel Group 1 is set to 80 all channels in the group that are not currently in use get set to 80 and the channels that are already in use retain their current settings 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS Channel Current Channel Resulting Channel Group Value Value Value 50 j EXCLUSIVE When a channel group is set to Exclusive any channels that are not in the channel group will be set to 0 off and all channels in the group will be set as per the channel settings Example Channels 5 and 6 are fully on Channel Group 1 contains Channels 1 2 3 and 4 If Channel Group 1 is set to 80 all channels except those in Channel Group 1 are switched off Channel Current Channel Resulting Channel Group Value Value Value 80 8 jm a HIGHEST TAKES PRECEDENCE If two or more channel groups are in effect together only those settings that are the highest will be applied a Example Channel Group 1 contains channels 1 2 and 3 Channel Group 2 also contains channels 1 2 and 3 but the two groups settings are different The table below shows the settings for each group and the result when both channels are
255. s used to assign fixtures into channels dimmer patching etc RIGHT CLICK POP UP MENUS Right click menus are hidden menus accessible by right clicking the mouse button If there is a right click menu available for a feature it will appear Once available you can click on the desired menu item If you right click and a menu appears that you do not want to use simply press the escape key on your keyboard or click elsewhere on the screen and the menu will disappear SCREEN REAL ESTATE As the name suggests screen real estate refers to the screen area you have available on your computer monitor for viewing information The individual features of LightFactory are in their own separate windows and can be arranged resized on the computer screen http www lifact com 27 LIGHTFACTORY CONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS COMPUTER GONCEPTS according to an individual technician s preference LightFactory will remember for next time lt is also possible to add one or more extra monitors thus expanding the available screen real estate WINDOW DOCKING Some windows in LightFactory can be docked onto other windows This means that the two windows are attached to one another which is useful if you want to have two related windows remain next to each other at all times MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface an industry standard interface used on electronic musical keyboards and PCs for computer control of musical instrument
256. s you want to record into so that a tick marks your selection 6 Select OK to complete this operation Note The cue selection dialog will default to the last selected cue list and the next available integer cue number If you are adding channels to an existing cue then channels that already exist in the cue will be overwritten with the current values This operation will also record the current state of fixtures and all of their properties To cancel the operation and return to the channel window click on the Cancel button ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO A CUE This operation acts exactly as with Add active channels above however only channels that are currently selected will be added to the cue regardless of their active state ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO A CUE WITHOUT DIMMER This is a useful way to program moving and intelligent lights without the dimmer being recorded into the cue When using the cue system to create moving light effects you may sometimes want to control the dimmer light output using some manual control such as a submaster to learn about submasters see Shortcuts and Submasters on page 230 This operation works as above however every channel recorded will have the dimmer set to 0 http www lifact com 141 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CHANNEL DISPLAY 142 UPDATE REPLACE CUE WITH ACTIVE CHANNELS Use this option to change an existing cue
257. same effect again The assigned shortcut will can also be used to start and stop the effect on the selected channels http www lifact com 211 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR EFFECT PLAYBACK CONTROLS 212 Along the bottom of the effect editor are the three playback controls for testing and debugging your effects When the effect is played a progress line will follow the execution through the effect i n Use the play control to start the effect running In the case of simple chases the play control is also used to step through the chase n Pause Pausing an effect will stop its execution immediately but keep the position pointer at the current location If you start the effect again press play button the effect will continue from this location Pressing the rewind button will stop the effect and resets its position back to the start If the effect is restarted it will start from the beginning 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS DIMMER PATCHING LightFactory provides up to 30 000 control desk channels that can be assigned any number of DMX dimmers or intelligent fixtures Up to 32 768 DMX dimmers are supported by the software and can be patched into the control channels By default the system will create 500 control channels however you can increase this number in the System Properties You
258. shows A cue list is a way to collect a number of cues and assign a name or short description Examples of how groups can be used include Separate different Acts within a show Manage a number of shows all running in a single venue Create separate shows for a number of songs likely to play in a concert or venue To create a new cue list 1 Click on the Add Cue List button in the lower left corner of the window LightFactory will assign a default name and automatically create the starting cue 158 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CUE LIST EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS 2 To change the name click within the cue list field and type the desired name As soon as you exit the field the new name will be saved Press Escape to cancel the changes you have made and the current group name will return To remove a cue list 1 Select the desired group 2 Click on the Remove Show Group button 3 A confirmation box will prompt you to confirm this operation If you are sure you want to delete the group click the OK button ACTIVE VS SELECTED CWE LISTS A selected cue list is the cue list you are currently editing It can be identified by the small triangle to the left of the name The name of the selected cue list will also appear above the grid To select a different list simply click on the desired cue list name The active cue list refers to the play c
259. sing a standard Ethernet patch cable The window shown below can be used to check that LightFactory is seeing the connected wings and that they are configured correctly The lower half of the window will show any debug or broadcast messages from the wing and aids with fault finding LightFactory Properties System Database Settings Registration Visualiser External Wings Media Appearance Shortcuts Type IP Address Page Number No interface selected defaulting to first available Starting wing interface interface started Debug messages are being received Message Count 4 Net Interface 192 168 1 18 255 255 255 0 w Figure 32 System Properties External Wings At the bottom of this window you can set the network interface that the software will use to communicate with the wings By default the software will pick the first valid interface and on most systems this is the only interface For more information about using the external wings see the hardware setup section Installing Enttec Wings Page 52 There is little or no setup required in LightFactory to use the hardware wings and this screen should only be used to check that everything is running correctly or to debug problems 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS MEDIA The settings in the media tab are used to globally control the output of media playb
260. ss to a number of functions within the software Some of the assignments that can be made to shortcuts include Channel selection Channel Group Selection Cue Go Back Pause Reset Execute Fixture Properties Effects Run Pause Reset Execute level groups http www lifact com 111 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 112 As with submasters shortcuts can be accessed through an on screen display or by connecting additional hardware On screen shortcuts also have the added feature of being designed for use with a touch screen display LightFactory provides 1800 user assignable shortcuts that are accessed through 20 pages Access to the on screen shortcuts is obtained by clicking on the button to the right of the shortcut page selection Open on screen shortcut ShortcutPage OS Se e page Shortcut page control ON SCREEN SHORTCUTS The shortcut window is a grid of 90 buttons each tagged with a number description and colour u Shortcut r Pai Paj Deen Shorties page 0 wet om Full Gace Figure 43 On Screen Shortcuts 20 21 If a shortcut is not assigned the button will on eaer appear greyed out and cannot be selected eee When a shortcut is assigned a default Set Text Colour description is created and appears below the e p Set Image shortcut number Set Image from Fixture Clear
261. starting address of 26 See Figure 17 Click on the Save amp Close button to exit this window and complete the patching process 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd QUICK START LIGHTFACTORY CONTROLLING A MOVING LIGHT A GUIDE FOR USERS We are now ready to use this fixture in the channel window as desk channel 6 To patch other moving lights simply repeat the procedure above patching each light into the desired channel _ same type all at once by changing the quantity Qty number in the available fixtures section of the window CONTROLLING A MOVING LIGHT This section assumes that you know how to open the channel window see page 60 and have already done the example above in Patching a Moving Light page 61 1 Open the channel window again if not already open and click on the Unselect All button along the bottom of the window You will now have only the channels that are active highlighted 2 Have a close look at channel six and notice that the content of the cell has changed It is now labelled Fixture 6 and below the label is the name of the fixture followed by its properties To see all of the properties Move the mouse in between the first and second row until the mouse pointer changes to the sizing cursor two arrows pointing up and down separated by two horizontal lines ii Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse toward the bottom of the window about 2cm
262. step will be seen on your dmx output Use Show dimmer levels as percentage to view the dimmer field as a percentage value By default this field is shown as dmx values 0 to 255 ADDING CHANNELS TO A STEP On the left of the step display are all of the channels available in the system Channels can be selected individually or a range can be selected by clicking and dragging the mouse over the channels you want to include Selected channels can be added to the step by clicking on the button Channels can also be added to the group using the command edit box at the bottom right of the window g4 Add Channels Figure 100 Group add channels command interface Use this box to enter the same syntax as you are familiar with in the command line window Press enter or click on Add Channels to process the command e g 1 5 30 will add channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to the step with their value set to 30 REMOVING CHANNELS FROM A STEP To remove channels from the group select the channel from the right hand channel list and click the _ button EDITING CHANNEL VALUES To maximise the included channel side of the window you can hide the available channels by clicking on the hide button between the two sections Hs Minimise available channels Figure 101 Simple chase channels splitter bar 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS To edit
263. sting chase The keyboard shortcut control s can be used as an alternative to the right click menu A simple chase is a series of steps each containing a set lighting state This is similar to a cue list however the transition control is limited and a chase can be run automatically from within a cue To record a chase step setup the channels to the state you want to record and select add active channels to chase step from the menu The following dialog will ask you to select the chase you want to record to and provide the option to record into an existing step or a new step 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS Select Chase Step Eg Effect Group Common Effects w Default Step Time Default Fade Time 3 Cancel Figure 68 Creating or selecting a chase step Select the chase you want to add the lighting state to or enter a new name to create a new chase The step number will default to the next available step To create a new step click OK and the system will record you chase step To add the current lighting state to an existing step select the step number from the drop down list and click OK The default step and fade time can be set using the edit provided These values are global to the entire chase and cannot be set per step To cancel the operation at any time click on the Cancel button ADD SELECTED CHANNELS TO SIMPLE
264. t will jump from point to point at equal time intervals STOP AT EACH POINT Set this option to run the effect more like a chase where each point becomes a step The effect will play normally however when each point is reached the effect will pause and wait for a play command http www lifact com 207 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR MEDIA EFFECT 208 The media playback provides an easy way to trigger audio and video clips from with LightFactory It is designed to provide a very simple playback control and will only play 1 file at a time You can use this feature to playback sound effects or video clips within a cue lists rm Li tttocts fatter Jog Stow Effects Mode lee Vito lie Mbt ng Madai ge Meda a bs Library E fects tt Ee wee ia tt Nemore ag 1era e Sect Figure 127 Effects Editor Media Effect Once you have created the effect you can modify the file that will play where the file starts playing in seconds and how long it will play for File Name This is the actual media file located somewhere on your system Use the button at the end of the edit box to open a file dialog for locating your media Start Time Set the time in HH MM SS MS that you want the media clip to play from If for example you want the clip to play 1 minute and 23 seconds into the file then enter 00 01 23 00 into the edit provided Play Length Set the length in decimal secon
265. t that will follow a defined curve LightFactory provides an advanced path editor that allows you to define the minimum number of points A Catmull Rom Spline curve will automatically create the best fit curve between each point Two control points are automatically created to provide the ability to control the curve entering and leaving the first and last point Path Editor 25 VL5 Arc B M4 Moving Light Path Path Time 5 00 Sec Elasticity 0 00 Resize Figure 113 Moving Light Path Editor To start creating paths simply click inside the white space containing dashed crosshairs With each click a new point will be created and a curve will automatically be placed between them The points you have created will be shown as small red circles These points can be moved by clicking on the small circle holding the mouse down and dragging the point to the desired location The control points are identified by the small numbers beside each point there is also no line between the control point and the other 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS points Control point numbered 1 is the starting point and number 2 is the ending point Points excluding control points can be removed from the curve by clicking on the button in the controls on the right hand side This will remove the last point added to the curve Points must be removed in the
266. te effect however it is missing the channels that the effect will use to run The selected library is highlighted in green and the heading along the top of the right hand of the window will display the library name To add an existing property attribute effect into the library simply select it from the tree and while holding down the left mouse button drag it to library section of the window The name you have given the effect will also become the name of the library item You can also create a blank library effect by right clicking on the library section and selecting Add from the popup menu A dialog will appear asking for the name of the new library effect Enter an appropriate name and click OK to complete the operation Click on Cancel to return to the effects window without creating the new item To remove an entry from the library use the right click menu again and select Delete from the available options A dialog will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECT LIBRARY SHORTCUTS Assign a shortcut to provide a quick access to running library effects in the channel display Library effects are automatically available in a drop down menu along the top of the channel display When the library effect is turned on the effect will run on the currently selected channels until stopped by selecting the
267. ted with when you start the software This window is where you can access all of the other features in the software such as the cue lists or effects editor The grand master GM on the right hand side of the window provides overall control of all fixture intensity levels T Command Interface File Windows Help Shortcut Page Submaster Page Channel Display F12 GM Software is registered to LightFactory Software Group Editor F11 for 10 OM Universels LightFactory Professional Edition Cue List F10 Sistem will output to the first 10 Enttec DM on Ethernet devices Bec Ector Hardware setup complete Adding 2046 channels to the system Done Dimmer Patching F8 DM Display Fr Show Aunners F6 Effects Runners F9 Macro Editor F4 Palettes F3 Figure 22 Command Interface Window i mm Co This window also allows you to control your lighting system using a basic text interface Traditional lighting desks have provided a command interface as a means to access large numbers of channels where individual buttons or faders were impractical It may seem antiquated to include a command interface in LightFactory because it has the flexible channel window providing access to thousands of channels from one simple screen but this is far from true Once familiar with the command structure the command interface can be a very quick and powerful way of setting up scenes during complex programming sequences
268. ter the number 5 into the field labelled Fade In and the number 2 into the field labelled Fade Out 2 Wedo not want cues 1 and 2 to cross fade so we need to set a delayed start on cue 2 of 2 seconds This will cause cue 2 to wait the same length of time it takes cue 1 to fade out In the row for cue 2 enter the number 2 in the field labelled Delay and enter a 1 into the field Fade In 3 For cue 3 we do want across fade so we can set the fade out of cue 2 to 3 seconds and the fade in of cue 3 to 3 seconds The right hand fields should now be set as per Figure 20 below 2 Trigger Next Cue Delay Fadeln Dell Fade Out Fs Delay Timecode Cue 2 000 0 00 5 00s 0 00 2 D z 0 00 00 00 00 00 Cue 3 000 2 00 1 00 0 00 3 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 Cue 0 000 0 00 3 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 20 Basic Show Example Fade In Fade Out and Delay settings RUNNING THE SHOW 68 We are now ready to run our show for the first time and see the result of the procedure above If you have a real lighting rig connected to the system you should see the result apply to your dimmer system If you do not have any dimmers connected use the channel window or DMX display to view the output If the start cue cue 0 is not highlighted in green as shown in Figure 20 above select it as the starting cue by double clicking on 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd QUICK START LIGHTFACTOR
269. the bottom left corner of the screen 252 See Rec se sm of on re ate 8 Jew 7 e L 2 ae Lor L Ls eteoe onga paaa e Figure 155 LightFactory Remote Disconnected 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE LIGHTFACTORY USING LF REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS Make sure LightFactory is running and the Telnet interface is enabled When the software starts you will see a message indicating that the Telnet interface is running Click on the Connect button to connect to a LightFactory system You will see the following screen appear q 1 52 ok Connect IP address 192 168 1 8 r Port number p100 Figure 156 LightFactory Remote Connect Screen In the box labelled IP address enter the Internet address of the computer running LightFactory server If you do not know the IP address of the LightFactory server open the Properties window for the network interface that is connected to the same network Start gt Settings gt Network Connections gt Network name e g Start gt Settings gt Network Connections gt Local Area Connection The Properties can be accessed by right clicking on the network interface and selecting it from the resulting popup menu Click on the Support tab to view the following window http www lifact com 253 LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS USING LF REMOTE Wireless Net
270. the dimmer view click on the desired dimmer number and hold the left mouse button down 2 Drag the dimmer over the channel in the channel view area When you release the mouse the channel will automatically be patched to the new value Multiple dimmers can be patched to a single channel by clicking in the Detail field and entering a list of channels separated by a comma Note Multiple dimmers connected to a channel will output the same value dependent on the channel value and the channel characteristic curve for more on channel characteristics see Channel Characteristic on page 221 To reset a channel back to its default 1 to 1 configuration click on the button to the right of the Detail field INTELLIGENT FIXTURES Intelligent fixtures use more than one physical dimmer to control various aspects or properties of the luminare A channel can only be patched to one intelligent fixture and can be identified by the name of the fixture in the detail column of the channel view To patch an intelligent fixture to a channel 1 Select the desired luminare from the tree view under the title Available Fixtures 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY DIMMER PATCHING A GUIDE FOR USERS Note All of the fixtures are grouped under the _ brand name and can be accessed by clicking on _the small plus to the left of the brand name _ The brand wi
271. the laws of New Zealand and is Subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts of New Zealand Miscellaneous This Licence records the entire understanding and agreement between the Licensee and DSL This Licence supersedes all previous understandings or agreements whether written oral or both between the Licensee and DSL DSL reserves the right to amend the terms of this Licence on sixty 60 days written notice posted on DSL s website Continued use of the Software by the Licensee following the sixty 60 day notice period will constitute acceptance of the amended terms of the Licence and the provisions of this Licence will be deemed to be altered accordingly Any waiver by DSL of its rights or remedies under this Licence will be effective only if it is recorded in writing and signed by DSL If the waiver related to a breach of any provision of this Licence this will not unless stated otherwise operate as a waiver of any other breach of that provision No waiver of any breach or failure to enforce any provision of this Licence at any time by DSL will in any way affect limit or waive DSL s right to subsequently require strict compliance with this agreement If the Licensee has any dispute with DSL in connection with this Licence or the Software it must give written notice to DSL and may submit the dispute for mediation by a single mediator nominated by the President for the time being of the New Zealand Law Society In the ev
272. the previous window and try searching removable media Note The latest drivers can be downloaded from the LightFactory web site http www lifact com _ Result The following window will be displayed Poured Haw Hardware ined Pleme palel iha beat mneh bee poe hudass Irom lha bel hana USED Fitesans Loses wema Mga ectuner D The dieser op eed dete re Lane eh oie eran ocean ipsa cee Click on the Next button to continue Result The following warning will be displayed A The softens pou ane installing for this hara i USED M2 Fimevare Lode ar rect papred indar Logo behr bo werify i compshbdity wah raas MP Les aves vty Ube lerla e areecalera Continuing pour instaiistion of this coltwase map impam ow dedlaloize he conac opealen ol your system either immediotely arin the future Winmanlt airnrngh recemmenis Whal you slap thes inelallalien new ane content ther hardware vendo hor aoltwaae that has peceed Windows Logo tanting Lonkrass Sarran F Unless you have specific security concerns with your computer click on the Continue Anyway button to proceed with the installation Result The firmware loader drivers will be installed and a progress window will be displayed as below 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY LIGHTFACTORY INSTALLING DMX HARDWARE A GUIDE FOR USERS Fourd Haw Hardware Wirand Pene sa ahia the mrad malas the poliame ra URDEI Fimea L iuc py
273. tinue loading the software A dialog will inform you if incorrect details have been entered and allow three attempts to correct the mistake before returning you to the previous window Click on the Cancel button at any time to abort this process Registration details can also be entered through the System Properties in the File menu once the software has started After the software has loaded the main window Command Interface will open You are now ready to use the software See the Quick Start section Page 59 to begin finding your way around the software T Command Imierface De yikes he ShateatPage DS a stamens op Cerreta EM Sosy Saha S ofbesaee ri seater be Lesher oo n Eda 11 ka 10 Dts Lr wii Dieii Hordeere potun comodehe F Adina JDE chasnnedn tothe miem tie Uno DME Depla FF Paleties F 3 E ba bas g 5 Figure 5 Command Interface LIGHTFACGTORY INSTALLING LIGHTFACTORY A GUIDE FOR USERS REGISTRATION amp LICENSING REGISTRATION amp LICENSING 36 When the software starts the registration details are shown in the first few lines of the command interface In the above example the software is registered to LightFactory Software and is registered to communicate with 10 DMX universes If more DMX universes are connected than the registration allows the system will simply ignore the additional dimmers Once the software is running you can access the re
274. tle to highlight it and enter the desired value To new value will appear in all fields as you type Press the enter key to finish the entry buffer and begin entering new values TIME VS FIXTURE EFFECTS An effect segment has a start offset time start state length and end state When an effect runs it will progress through the list of segments executing each one in turn If for example the first segment has an offset of 10 seconds the segment will execute 10 seconds after the effect itself has started When a segment is executed its start lighting state will be set immediately The fixture will then perform a fade for the length of the effect to its end lighting state If a segment is for an intelligent fixture then all of the properties excluding dimmer will be pre http www lifact com 185 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR fetched and set up for the start state at the end of the previous segment If for example a moving light will start in a different position for the second segment then it will be moved to this new position at the end of the previous segment When the effect starts intelligent fixtures will be set to the start state of the first segment Note Each segment of an effect cannot overlap any other segment 1 Effects Citar Show Eltects Ho FHeri Selected Hj Menai Eea 1 mi ial F m Bifa Fiia Maley Bale Bifa Ba EE PE Ta E E rise
275. to the frequency that you want the task to be performed a Daily Scheduled lask wirard Scheduled lask wirard Shope he tees are dry pou eat thes Larch bo jLiart Bart pee ima Beery tS ms Briat Bhat veoh diry bec tee Tipsy M Tuesday l Eds M erei M pard D aei m e o 104 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS c Monthly Scheduled lask wirard Scheduled lask wirard Sek he teen are dry pou reat Ud Lirih bo art Bart pees kiddie H Tatia 07 HH e Every Hour or Every X seconds No additional information is required for this option 4 Once you have selected the schedule options for the task click Next to continue to the final page Scheduled task wizard You have successfully scheduled the Following task Hourly Fountain show 1 Cancel 5 To complete the setup of the new task click on the Finished button The new task will now appear in the task list and will immediately become active http www lifact com 105 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 106 MODIFY A SCHEDULED TASK Created scheduled tasks can be modified You can modify the shortcut to run the schedule or the specifics of a particular task To modify a task double click on the desired entry or click once and select properties from the option at the top of the window T
276. to the software It allows you to modify the output of a channel and control the properties attributes of intelligent fixtures 1 Open the channel window by clicking on the Channel Display button on the right hand side of the command interface ink Figure 16 Channel Window If this is the first time you have used the software you should see the window above displayed on your screen Each channel in the system is represented by a cell in a two dimensional grid The grid will always try to fit as many channels across as it can and so resizing the window will allow you to see as many channels as possible 2 A standard Windows scroll bar on the right hand side can be used to scroll through the non visible channels If you do not have any channels selected you can also use the scroll wheel on your mouse to scroll through the channels 3 Select channel 1 by left clicking on it with your mouse You will notice that the cell changes colour to a pale blue 4 Nowclick on channel 3 and notice that this cell also changes colour By clicking and selecting these channels we have told the software what it is we want to work with We can now issue commands to these channels 5 On your keyboard enter the number 30 and press enter 60 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd QUICK START LIGHTFACTORY PATCHING A MOVING LIGHT A GUIDE FOR USERS As you enter the numbers you will see them appear along the title bar of the window As soo
277. tp www lifact com 173 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 174 DELAY To specify a delay before the cue will execute enter a valid time in seconds into this field Internally a cue has finished just before the fade out executes to allow for cross fades between two cues The delay can be used to stop this behaviour by setting its delay time to the previous cue s fade out time FADE IN The fade in field determines the time in seconds that the cue takes for each channel to go from their current value to the value contained in the cue The fade time will apply to all fixture properties that are set within the cue Note An override fade time for individual channels can be set in the Show Channel Editor _ window See page 164 DWELL The dwell time is used when you want the cue to operate automatically For example if you want the cue to fade in wait for a specific time and then fade out without any user interaction The dwell time in seconds specifies how long the cue will wait after the fade in before executing the fade out FADE OUT The fade out field determines the time in seconds that the cue takes for each channel to go from the value contained in the cue to the value contained in the next cue If the channel is not contained in the next cue then it will fade to 0 The fade time will apply to all fixture properties that are set within the cue EFFECTS DELAY
278. tton to open a image dialog Select any image that represents the matrix of fixtures and click Open to complete the operation The image should appear in the window just above the load and clear buttons Click on the Clear button to remove the image from the system http www lifact com 225 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS DMX DISPLAY DMX DISPLAY The DMX display is provided as a means to debug the system output by showing the final output values being sent to the DMX hardware LY Dimmer View Joey Dec 0 fei OM DHS Dhd GMS fe OM DMa OMS OMI De Oe 6 ODM DM tfh 1 0 2 0 a0 4 0 5 0 G 0 ra G m5 3 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 ir 16 0 13 0 1 0 21 0 22 0 29 0 24 0 35 0 26 0 af 0 3 0 2 0 m 0 Hn w 7 0 u 5 4 0 x0 6 w 0 7 0 4 0 4 0 i 6 43 0 a 45 0 16 0 d7 0 4 0 44 0 9 0 1 0 52 0 3 0 H i a 0 56 0 af 8 0 54 0 0 bi 0 B2 0 B3 0 g 65 0 0 Bf 0 0 6 6 Pd n o 720 73 0 M0 hie 0 76 0 m 7 0 He w m 0 0 y 0 i 6 0 Bp 0 Dr wo 6 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 93 0 1 0 0 0 oF 0 2 0 35 0 100 0 1 6 10 0 103 0 14 0 105 0 Te 0 Wr o Tie Q We 0 110 0 111 0 T2 113 0 TIF 0 8 0 TIE 0 Wir 118 0 119 0 Wa 0 TZ 0 VW 724 0 14 g 150 1 0 127p Te 0 Ta 0 A y 13 0 IA y LETE THO 1 0 13 25 1a a 14 0 1 0 147 0 142 0 T3 0 144 0 145 0 1T 0 147 0 144 0 144 WA 150 75 11 0 152 1 0 154 0 1 0 1 0 1 O T 0 1 0 ED A ThI 0 TE 0 Tha l 1H 0 165 0 16 0 th lh 0 169 0 ao 1m0 wai 17
279. u create a new lighting effect in LightF actory Select the desired type of effect below and click Next Simple lighting chase Time vs Fixture Effect Property Attribute Effect Matrix LED Effect Media Playback Next gt gt Figure 91 New Effects Builder Opening Page Select the type of effect you want to create from the options available Select the type of effect you want to create and click Next to continue SIMPLE LIGHTING CHASE A simple chase is a step based effect similar to an automated cue list Each step contains a list of fixtures each in a specific state New Effect Builder Simple Lighting Chase AC Enter the name for this effect Rear truss par can chase Number of steps 3 f an Default Step Time 0 00 i Seconds Default Fade Time 0 00 Seconds Figure 92 New Effects Builder Simple chase To complete building the effect enter a name to identify the chase and set how many steps you want to include in the effect 178 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY EFFECTS EDITOR A GUIDE FOR USERS If you want to set the default step time the time the system will wait before executing the next step or fade time enter the values into the fields provided Click on Finished to create the new chase and open the chase editor The newly created chase will immediately become visible in the right hand side of the effects editor TIME VS FIX
280. ue command can be shortened to C lt cue list gt lt cue number gt C Go C Back C Stop C Rest BLACKOUT 80 One common function you may want to execute is to blackout the entire system This can be achieved using either the bo blackout command Either of these commands can be followed by a channel list to limit which channels are reset Example BO 1 20 This will blackout the channels 1 through to 20 http www lifact com 75 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE MACRO The macro command can be used to execute any of the macros added to the show The syntax for this command is Macro lt macro Name gt Enter the word macro followed by the name or part name of the macro you want to run As soon as you enter the command the macro will execute This command can be shortened to M lt macro name gt Example M Reset Movers The above command will execute the macro called Reset Movers if it exists If a macro does not exists the command will fail RECORD REC To record a cue from the command line use the record command This can be abbreviated to just rec The syntax is of the form rec lt cue list gt lt cue number gt The cue list parameter is the name of the cue list to record into and the cue number is any cue number that exists in the cue You can exclude the cue list and the system will record into th
281. up Editor F11 for 10 DMX Universe s S h O rtc u ts Looking for DMX hardware Found USB DM 2 interface on universe 0 Found USB DM IN on universe 1 Found USB DM 2 interface on universe 2 Hardware setup complete Dine boing EE Adding 2048 channels to the system DMX Disol Done play F7 Submasters ow Runners F6 Effects Runners F5 Macro Editor F4 Palettes F3 Execute Da xtras 100 Py Figure 4 Command Interface Submasters and Shortcuts CUE LIST A cue list is a series of cues that define how the lighting is set during the various parts of a performance Example A band is performing a song in a concert Rather than having simple lighting that does not change for the duration of the song cues can be set up to change the lighting as the song progresses As each cue in the song is reached the lighting can be easily set for that part of the song by activating the relevant cue Shows and cues are set up and managed via the Cue List Editor See Cue List Editor on page 156 to learn how CUE LIST S To easily manage and organise of a large number of cues for a production LightFactory enables cues to be grouped into Cue Lists Example A concert contains 10 songs all of which have different lighting By creating a Cue List for each song the cues for each song can be easily identified and kept separate SHOW RUNNERS The Cue List Editor is used for setting up
282. us Turn this option on to force windows to use the ALT key regardless of the control currently with focus Optimise for touch screen Turn this on to enlarge the buttons in the channel display to be used with a touch screen Channel intensity bar colour Fixture intensity bar colour You can change the colour of the fade bar by clicking on the coloured box to the right of these labels The software allows the ability to set a different colour for conventional channels and intelligent fixtures to help identify the different types Grid background colour use this option if you wish to use a softer or different colour for the background of all grids in LightFactory Layout view background image To put a background image on the layout view channel display either enter the filename or click on the button to the right to bring up the file selection dialog Shortcut window to mirror available keys in Enttec shortcut keyboard If you are using the Enttec Shortcut keyboard and want to use the on screen shortcuts as a reference pad then set this option When selected the shortcut window will only display 60 shortcuts starting at 1 http www lifact com 97 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE SHORTCUTS Special system shortcuts are miscellaneous functions in the software that you may want to put onto a shortcut Most of these functions are related to the channel view such as the options i
283. use this feature select either the WYSIWYG or Capture check boxes If you want to temporarily disable the output uncheck the Output live data to visualiser Because saving patch information can be a slow process LightFactory provides an option to delay this operation till you have finalised the patch To automatically save the patch to the database as soon as it is received check the box Automatically save patch when received To send and receive selection commands from the visualiser use the Send and receive fixture selection option LightFactory Properties System Database Settinas Registration Visualiser External Wings Media Appearance Shortcuts pein sousbcaee ewes seatases saneed sanchoensescesaceassuasebensiag Enable Capture Support Output live data to visualiser Automatically save patch when received Send and receive fixture selection me Figure 31 System Properties WYSIWYG tab http www lifact com 93 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS COMMAND INTERFACE 94 EXTERNAL WINGS External wings are dedicated hardware designed to provide hand on control to LightFactory They include playback shortcut and program devices Each wing connects to LightFactory via a standard Ethernet connection If your Ethernet port is already in use or you are using more than one Wing you will need to connect the computer and the Wing s to an Ethernet Hub or Switch u
284. value To learn about how to create level groups see Level Group Editor on page 244 LOAD SELECTED FIXTURES FROM CUE This is a convenient option to load the state of the selected fixtures form the information stored in a cue Selecting a cue from the sub menus found off this menu option will set the selected fixtures to the same settings as they appear in the cue If a selected fixture does not exist in the cue then its values will remain unchanged RESET SELECTED FIXTURE PROPERTIES To reset all of the properties or attributes to their default state select Reset selected fixture properties from the menu options In most cases this will simply set the properties to 0 however some special properties such as pan and tilt may be different COMPACT VIEW GRID VIEW ONLY To fit more fixtures and channels on screen use the compact view to abbreviate the text and shrink the cell width and height Once you have shifted into the compact view you can still modify the cell size by dragging the edges To return to the full view right click and select Expanded View from the menu This will have replaced the Compact View option 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS AUTOSIZE CELLS GRID VIEW ONLY Select this option to automatically set the height and width of the cells based on the fixtures patched The auto size feature will leave a gap along t
285. ve channels to simple chase step Ctrl S 0 Cvan 0 1 0 Magenta 0 Add selected channels to simple chase step Ctri Alt S 2 0 Yellow 0 3 0 CTC 0 Create a simple chase from selected fixtures Gobo 1 0 a 0 Sar mn Level Groups 0 Saak sig o Load selected fixtures from Cue D 0 00 iris 0 0 el 0 Reset selected fixture properties Ctl R R 0 00 Control 0 0 Effect 1 0 Compact View R 0 00 Track Time 0 Dimmer Ti i I n 0 Frain JP 0 Autosize cells Fraim 1A 0 Fraim 2P o Reset cell size to default 0 Fraim 2A t0 Fraim 3P 0 Lock cell size 0 Fraim 3A q 0 Fraim 4P 0 Select odd fixtures of currently selected Ctrl Alt 0 0 Fraim 4A q ime 0 Fraim Rot Select even fixtures of currently selected Ctri Alt E Time 0 me 0 Auto Fan Selected Fixtures Ctrl F fime s ime Effect Time 0 Effect Time 0 Effect Time 0 Fraim 4A 0 Fraim 4A 0 Fraim 4A 0 Fraim Rot 0 Fraim Rot 0 Fraim Rot 0 Figure 62 Channel Window Right Click Popup Menu ADDING CHANNELS TO A CHANNEL GROUP Channel groups can be viewed by clicking on the Group Editor button on the command interface or selecting it from the Window menu For more information on channel groups see Channel Groups on page 17 and Channel Group Editor on page 150 ADD SELEGTED GHANNELS TO GROUP This menu option allows you to add currently selected channels to a group 1 Right click on the channel window 2 Select the Add selected channels to group
286. w Helenik Iridestiace AI laatse Numba of deck chanel 00 2 H D Urvas 15 InUnir nie 1 DMA Pime Rae 40 S Mouse wheel inita 1 Subm cerraindy 1 Enable Telat command ine itertace Echo telnet characters oO Check for rabea updates Oo Foun LighlF acon elk raaa ope aly chen poe Telnet Port TIU eg Deish papar size when printing ES Lari aiy Uria Figure 26 System Properties System tab DMX Hardware Input amp Output Use the drop down box s provided to configure the input and output hardware used by the software to communicate with your DMX system Supported hardware used to output to DMX networks Enttec DMX over Ethernet Protocol ESP ArtNet DMX over Ethernet Protocol Pathport DMX over Ethernet Protocol Enttec Open USB DMX Interface Enttec USB DMX Pro Interface Soundlight USB DMX Interface Same as Sunlite hardware Supported hardware used to input DMX into LightFactory for use as submasters Enttec DMX over Ethernet Protocol ESP 82 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS ArtNet DMX over Ethernet Protocol Pathpost DMX over Ethernet Protocol Enttec Open USB DMX Interface Enttec USB DMX Pro Interface Soundlight USB DMXIN Interface Same as Sunlite hardware Note After changing either of the hardware selection you will need to restart LightFactory for the ch
287. what the selected property of the fixtures will do As the effect plays the output value DMX value is derived from a point in the path A sin wave for example will output the DMX values 127 at time 0 0 at 1 4 of the way through the effect and full 255 at 3 4 of the way through the effect As you select a row in the items grid the path will be shown in the box in the bottom right of the window To change the assigned path click on the desired path on the left of the graph MODIFYING A PATH The first 4 paths cannot be edited and will always be available in the system If you are currently using one of the default paths and would like to alter it click on the Copy Path button The currently selected path will be copied to a new name that can now be modified To change the name click on the path twice and a small edit will popup allowing you to modify it To delete a custom path Only custom paths can be removed from the editor that you have created and no longer need click on the Remove Path button The path for the selected item will default to the first item in the list http www lifact com 201 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 202 Path Arall Path s 255 A Sin Wav Cos Wave Saw Wave E PWM Wave Special fx path 127 copy of Saw Wave copy of Saw Wave oo copy of Saw Wave Elasticity 0 00 s c cony of of Saw Wav Com ee a O Figure 122 Prop
288. will apply the inclusive exclusive options INVERT SELECTION Invert selection will select all channels not currently selected and de select the current channels UNDO The last selection operation made can be reversed by clicking on this button This button will also undo the last channel settings SELECT NEXT This option will select the next patched channel relative to the current selection If channel 1 is currently selected and this button is pressed then channel 2 will become selected and channel 1 will be unselected SELECT PREVIOUS Click on this button to select the channel before the currently selected channel ON Selected channels will immediately be set to the ON value set in the properties window OFF Selected channels will immediately be turned off SOLO Selected channels will be turned ON value set in properties window and all other channels will be turned off DBO All channels will immediately be turned off PARK Parking selected fixtures will freeze the DMX output and prevent any changes happening to the fixture Parked fixtures are identified 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY CHANNEL DISPLAY A GUIDE FOR USERS by red text There is also an option in the system properties to not record parked channels RELEASE Parked channels and fixtures will be released from the park state and changes will become active operates on selected fixtures RELEASE ALL
289. with the last read timecode Once you have created the cue list you can then play back the timecode track and stamp each cue in real time Because using the right click menu is not a quick enough operation when playing back media in real time a shortcut control t is also provided Playback the timecode track http www lifact com 161 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS CUE LIST EDITOR 162 and press the control t to stamp the next non zero cue at the appropriate times SET PRE FETCH FLAG FOR ALL INTELLIGENT FIXTURES IN THIS CUE By default the Pre fetch flag for all fixtures is unselected To set this flag on all intelligent fixtures within the cue your mouse Is over select this form the menu SET PRE FETCH FLAG FOR ALL INTELLIGENT FIXTURES IN SHOW GROUP To set the Pre fetch flag for all channels in all cues select this form the pop up menu SET FORCE PROP FLAG FOR ALL FIXTURES IN THIS CUE By default the Force Prop flag for all fixtures is unselected To set this flag on all intelligent fixtures within the cue your mouse Is over select this form the menu SET FORCE PROP FLAG FOR ALL FIXTURES IN SHOW GROUP To set the Force Prop flag for all channels in all cues select this form the pop up menu RESET GRID LAYOUT TO DEFAULT If you have rearranged the grid moved or resized columns you can use this option to return the layout to how it was when
290. work Connection Status Az Figure 157 Network Interface Properties Support The IP Address is listed just below Address Type and is a four numbers separated by a point Use this number as the address to connect to in LightFactory Remote The edit box for entering the IP address in LFRemote will show the last entered address when the software starts You can also use the drop down conirol to select IP addresses from list The list will contain all of the IPs entered into the program to date Next enter the Port number if it is different to 3100 on your configuration in LightFactory 3100 is the default value and should not be changed unless you have another application also using this port Once you have the LightFactory server IP and Port number entered correctly click on the Connect button The top of the screen will show the word Connecting while the software attempts to communicate with your LightFactory system Once connected the following screen will return with all of the buttons enabled 254 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd LIGHTFACTORY REMOTE LIGHTFACTORY USING LF REMOTE A GUIDE FOR USERS LightFactory Remo g w 1 52 X fo 192 168 1 eels Eeee Elele HH i PEELE Disconnect E Figure 158 LightFactory Remote Main screen ENTERING COMMANDS The remote is now ready to accept command to control your lighting system The syntax for entering commands is exactly the same a
291. x in the bottom left corner of the segment property editor allows you to see the lighting changes you are making immediately on stage When this option is checked the http www lifact com 191 LIGHTFACTORY REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW A GUIDE FOR USERS EFFECTS EDITOR 192 fixture you are working on will reflect the changes you make immediately To enter values as DMX 0 255 check the DMX Val box provided This setting will be remembered each time you use the software Note The fixture will always reflect the last change you made so if you change the end state the fixture will move to and reflect the current end state settings If you then edit the 3 start state the fixture will change to reflect all of As you click on the Edit Start or Edit End buttons the fixture control window attached to the right of the effects editor will show in the title bar whether you are editing start states or end states OPTIONS As you move your mouse over each of the segments in the effect you will notice that they will be highlighted in a brighter green Clicking on the right mouse button will bring up a number of advanced options to assist with creating effects Delete segment Delete All Segments Cut segment Chrl Copy segment Chri Copy all segments Chri 4 Paste to this fixture Ctrl Create a Follow on segment Create a moving light path Create fade in For segment Create a fade out For segment C
292. y executing the commands This saves time as well as reducing the chance of errors being made SHORTCUTS 26 A shortcut is a quick route to a particular setting or feature that is used frequently There are many places that shortcuts can be assigned within LightFactory A shortcut may select some fixtures run a cue start an effect apply a setting or just about any operation 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd CONCEPTS LIGHTFACTORY COMPUTER GONCEPTS A GUIDE FOR USERS COMPUTER CONCEPTS In order to use the LightFactory software it is necessary to understand a few basic computer concepts MOUSE SCROLL WHEEL A mouse is a small device that connects to a computer It is used for navigating around computer software by means of a pointer Many types of mouse have what is known as a scroll wheel This is a wheel set into the top of the mouse usually located between the left and right buttons In LightFactory the scroll wheel is used for increasing decreasing dimmer values in a similar way to the sliders on a lighting console desk DRAG AND DROP Drag and drop is a commonly used method of moving one or more items from one location to another using the mouse Typically it is done by left clicking on the item you wish to move then while still holding down the mouse button moving the mouse to the required destination Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer is over the destination In LightFactory drag and drop i
293. y show is the process of copying the current show to a new show name The current show remains loaded and does not change but a snapshot is made and stored for later retrieval 78 2004 2007 Dream Solutions Ltd REFERENCE WINDOW OVERVIEW LIGHTFACTORY COMMAND INTERFACE A GUIDE FOR USERS 1 Open the save show dialog by clicking on the file menu and selecting Save Show See Figure 24 Show name Save Channel State Save Channel Patch Save Channel Characterstic Save Show Group Save Level Groups Save Cues Save FX Sequences Save Macros Figure 24 Save Show dialog 2 Select the parts of the show you would like to save Like the load show option you can select what aspects of the show you would like to save _Note By default all of the current show will be saved Any aspects you do not wish to save can be un ticked by clicking on the tick boxes next to the relevant options Only the ticked options will be saved 3 You must enter a valid show name to save the current configuration Either type a new name or select an existing name from the drop down combo box Note If you select an existing show all information will be overwritten by the current _ show A warning dialog will inform you if you are 4 Click on the Save button to complete this operation or Cancel to return to the current show DELETE SHOW All saved shows are stored in an internal SQL d

LightFactory User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents